HP Hewlett Packard Calculator 39gs User Manual

HP 39gs graphing calculator  
user's guide  
Edition3  
Part Number F2223AA-90001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Preface  
Manual conventions ..............................................................P-1  
Notice .................................................................................P-2  
1 Getting started  
On/off, cancel operations......................................................1-1  
The display ..........................................................................1-2  
The keyboard .......................................................................1-3  
Menus .................................................................................1-8  
Input forms ...........................................................................1-9  
Mode settings.....................................................................1-10  
Setting a mode...............................................................1-11  
Aplets (E-lessons).................................................................1-12  
Aplet library ..................................................................1-16  
Aplet views....................................................................1-16  
Aplet view configuration..................................................1-18  
Mathematical calculations....................................................1-19  
Using fractions....................................................................1-25  
Complex numbers ...............................................................1-29  
Catalogs and editors...........................................................1-30  
2 Aplets and their views  
Aplet views ..........................................................................2-1  
About the Symbolic view...................................................2-1  
Defining an expression (Symbolic view) ..............................2-1  
Evaluating expressions......................................................2-3  
About the Plot view...........................................................2-5  
Setting up the plot (Plot view setup).....................................2-5  
Exploring the graph..........................................................2-7  
Other views for scaling and splitting the graph ..................2-13  
About the numeric view...................................................2-16  
Setting up the table (Numeric view setup)..........................2-16  
Exploring the table of numbers.........................................2-17  
Building your own table of numbers..................................2-19  
“Build Your Own” menu keys...........................................2-20  
Example: plotting a circle ................................................2-20  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Function aplet  
About the Function aplet........................................................ 3-1  
Getting started with the Function aplet................................ 3-1  
Function aplet interactive analysis........................................... 3-9  
Plotting a piecewise-defined function................................ 3-12  
4 Parametric aplet  
About the Parametric aplet .................................................... 4-1  
Getting started with the Parametric aplet............................. 4-1  
5 Polar aplet  
Getting started with the Polar aplet ......................................... 5-1  
6 Sequence aplet  
About the Sequence aplet...................................................... 6-1  
Getting started with the Sequence aplet.............................. 6-1  
7 Solve aplet  
About the Solve aplet............................................................ 7-1  
Getting started with the Solve aplet.................................... 7-2  
Use an initial guess............................................................... 7-5  
Interpreting results ................................................................ 7-6  
Plotting to find guesses.......................................................... 7-7  
Using variables in equations................................................ 7-10  
8 Linear Solver aplet  
About the Linear Solver aplet ................................................. 8-1  
Getting started with the Linear Solver aplet.......................... 8-1  
9 Triangle Solve aplet  
About the Triangle Solver aplet .............................................. 9-1  
Getting started with the Triangle Solver aplet....................... 9-1  
10 Statistics aplet  
About the Statistics aplet...................................................... 10-1  
Getting started with the Statistics aplet.............................. 10-1  
Entering and editing statistical data ...................................... 10-6  
Defining a regression model.......................................... 10-12  
Computed statistics........................................................... 10-14  
Plotting............................................................................ 10-15  
Plot types .................................................................... 10-16  
Fitting a curve to 2VAR data ......................................... 10-17  
Setting up the plot (Plot setup view) ................................ 10-18  
Trouble-shooting a plot ................................................. 10-19  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exploring the graph......................................................10-19  
Calculating predicted values..........................................10-20  
11 Inference aplet  
About the Inference aplet .....................................................11-1  
Getting started with the Inference aplet .............................11-1  
Importing sample statistics from the Statistics aplet..............11-4  
Hypothesis tests ..................................................................11-8  
One-Sample Z-Test..........................................................11-8  
Two-Sample Z-Test..........................................................11-9  
One-Proportion Z-Test....................................................11-10  
Two-Proportion Z-Test....................................................11-11  
One-Sample T-Test........................................................11-12  
Two-Sample T-Test ........................................................11-14  
Confidence intervals..........................................................11-15  
One-Sample Z-Interval...................................................11-15  
Two-Sample Z-Interval ...................................................11-16  
One-Proportion Z-Interval...............................................11-17  
Two-Proportion Z-Interval ...............................................11-17  
One-Sample T-Interval ...................................................11-18  
Two-Sample T-Interval....................................................11-19  
12 Using the Finance Solver  
Background........................................................................12-1  
Performing TVM calculations ................................................12-4  
Calculating Amortizations................................................12-7  
13 Using mathematical functions  
Math functions....................................................................13-1  
The MATH menu ............................................................13-1  
Math functions by category ..................................................13-2  
Keyboard functions.........................................................13-3  
Calculus functions...........................................................13-6  
Complex number functions...............................................13-7  
Constants ......................................................................13-8  
Conversions...................................................................13-8  
Hyperbolic trigonometry..................................................13-9  
List functions ................................................................13-10  
Loop functions..............................................................13-10  
Matrix functions ...........................................................13-11  
Polynomial functions .....................................................13-11  
Probability functions......................................................13-12  
Real-number functions ...................................................13-13  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Two-variable statistics................................................... 13-17  
Symbolic functions ....................................................... 13-17  
Test functions............................................................... 13-18  
Trigonometry functions.................................................. 13-19  
Symbolic calculations........................................................ 13-20  
Finding derivatives....................................................... 13-21  
Program constants and physical constants ........................... 13-24  
Program constants........................................................ 13-24  
Physical constants ........................................................ 13-25  
14 Variables and memory management  
Introduction ....................................................................... 14-1  
Storing and recalling variables............................................. 14-2  
The VARS menu.................................................................. 14-4  
Memory Manager .............................................................. 14-9  
15 Matrices  
Introduction ....................................................................... 15-1  
Creating and storing matrices .............................................. 15-2  
Working with matrices........................................................ 15-4  
Matrix arithmetic ................................................................ 15-6  
Solving systems of linear equations .................................. 15-8  
Matrix functions and commands......................................... 15-10  
Argument conventions .................................................. 15-10  
Matrix functions........................................................... 15-10  
Examples......................................................................... 15-13  
16 Lists  
Displaying and editing lists.................................................. 16-4  
Deleting lists.................................................................. 16-6  
Transmitting lists............................................................. 16-6  
List functions....................................................................... 16-6  
Finding statistical values for list elements................................ 16-9  
17 Notes and sketches  
Introduction ....................................................................... 17-1  
Aplet note view.................................................................. 17-1  
Aplet sketch view................................................................ 17-3  
The notepad ...................................................................... 17-6  
18 Programming  
Introduction ....................................................................... 18-1  
Program catalog............................................................ 18-2  
Creating and editing programs ............................................ 18-4  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using programs ..................................................................18-7  
Customizing an aplet...........................................................18-9  
Aplet naming convention...............................................18-10  
Example......................................................................18-10  
Programming commands....................................................18-13  
Aplet commands ..........................................................18-14  
Branch commands........................................................18-17  
Drawing commands......................................................18-19  
Graphic commands ......................................................18-21  
Loop commands...........................................................18-23  
Matrix commands.........................................................18-24  
Print commands............................................................18-26  
Prompt commands........................................................18-26  
Stat-One and Stat-Two commands ..................................18-30  
Stat-Two commands......................................................18-30  
Storing and retrieving variables in programs....................18-31  
Plot-view variables........................................................18-32  
Symbolic-view variables ................................................18-39  
Numeric-view variables.................................................18-41  
Note variables .............................................................18-44  
Sketch variables...........................................................18-44  
19 Extending aplets  
Creating new aplets based on existing aplets .........................19-1  
Using a customized aplet ................................................19-3  
Resetting an aplet................................................................19-3  
Annotating an aplet with notes .............................................19-4  
Annotating an aplet with sketches .........................................19-4  
Downloading e-lessons from the web.....................................19-4  
Sending and receiving aplets ...............................................19-4  
Sorting items in the aplet library menu list ..............................19-6  
Reference information  
Glossary..............................................................................R-1  
Resetting the HP 39gs............................................................R-3  
To erase all memory and reset defaults................................R-3  
If the calculator does not turn on.........................................R-4  
Operating details..................................................................R-4  
Batteries..........................................................................R-4  
Variables .............................................................................R-6  
Home variables................................................................R-6  
Function aplet variables.....................................................R-7  
Parametric aplet variables .................................................R-8  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Polar aplet variables ........................................................ R-9  
Sequence aplet variables................................................ R-10  
Solve aplet variables...................................................... R-11  
Statistics aplet variables.................................................. R-12  
MATH menu categories....................................................... R-13  
Math functions............................................................... R-13  
Program constants.......................................................... R-15  
Physical Constants ......................................................... R-16  
Program commands ....................................................... R-17  
Status messages ................................................................. R-18  
Limited Warranty  
Service ..........................................................................W-3  
Regulatory information.....................................................W-5  
Index  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preface  
The HP 39gs is a feature-rich graphing calculator. It is  
also a powerful mathematics learning tool. The HP 39gs  
is designed so that you can use it to explore mathematical  
functions and their properties.  
You can get more information on the HP 39gs from  
Hewlett-Packard’s Calculators web site. You can  
download customized aplets from the web site and load  
them onto your calculator. Customized aplets are special  
applications developed to perform certain functions, and  
to demonstrate mathematical concepts.  
Hewlett Packard’s Calculators web site can be found at:  
http://www.hp.com/calculators  
Manual conventions  
The following conventions are used in this manual to  
represent the keys that you press and the menu options  
that you choose to perform the described operations.  
Key presses are represented as follows:  
, etc.  
,
,
Shift keys, that is the key functions that you access by  
pressing the  
follows:  
key first, are represented as  
ACOS, etc.  
CLEAR,  
MODES,  
Numbers and letters are represented normally, as  
follows:  
5, 7, A, B, etc.  
Menu options, that is, the functions that you select  
using the menu keys at the top of the keypad are  
represented as follows:  
,
,
.
Input form fields and choose list items are represented  
as follows:  
Function, Polar, Parametric  
Your entries as they appear on the command line or  
within input forms are represented as follows:  
2
2*X -3X+5  
P-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice  
This manual and any examples contained herein are  
provided as-is and are subject to change without notice.  
Except to the extent prohibited by law, Hewlett-Packard  
Company makes no express or implied warranty of any  
kind with regard to this manual and specifically disclaims  
the implied warranties and conditions of merchantability  
and fitness for a particular purpose and Hewlett-Packard  
Company shall not be liable for any errors or for  
incidental or consequential damage in connection with  
the furnishing, performance or use of this manual and the  
examples herein.  
© 1994–1995, 1999–2000, 2003–2006 Hewlett-  
Packard Development Company, L.P.  
The programs that control your HP 39gs are copyrighted  
and all rights are reserved. Reproduction, adaptation, or  
translation of those programs without prior written  
permission from Hewlett-Packard Company is also  
prohibited.  
P-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1
Getting started  
On/off, cancel operations  
To turn on  
Press  
to turn on the calculator.  
To cancel  
When the calculator is on, the  
current operation.  
key cancels the  
To turn off  
Press  
OFF to turn the calculator off.  
To save power, the calculator turns itself off after several  
minutes of inactivity. All stored and displayed information  
is saved.  
If you see the (()) annunciator or the Low Batmessage,  
then the calculator needs fresh batteries.  
HOME  
HOME is the calculator’s home view and is common to all  
aplets. If you want to perform calculations, or you want to  
quit the current activity (such as an aplet, a program, or  
an editor), press  
. All mathematical functions are  
available in the HOME. The name of the current aplet is  
displayed in the title of the home view.  
Protective cover  
The calculator is provided with a slide cover to protect the  
display and keyboard. Remove the cover by grasping  
both sides of it and pulling down.  
You can reverse the slide cover and slide it onto the back  
of the calculator. this will help prevent you losing the  
cover while you are using the calculator.  
To prolong the life of the calculator, always place the  
cover over the display and keyboard when you are not  
using the calculator.  
Getting started  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
The display  
To adjust the  
contrast  
Simultaneously press  
decrease) the contrast.  
and  
(or  
) to increase (or  
To clear the display  
Press CANCEL to clear the edit line.  
Press  
CLEAR to clear the edit line and the  
display history.  
Parts of the  
display  
Title  
History  
Edit line  
Menu key  
labels  
Menu key or soft key labels. The labels for the menu  
keys’ current meanings.  
menu key in this picture. “Press  
is the label for the first  
” means to press the  
first menu key, that is, the leftmost top-row key on the  
calculator keyboard.  
Edit line. The line of current entry.  
History. The HOME display (  
) shows up to four  
lines of history: the most recent input and output. Older  
lines scroll off the top of the display but are retained in  
memory.  
Title. The name of the current aplet is displayed at the top  
of the HOME view. RAD, GRD, DEG specify whether  
Radians, Grads or Degrees angle mode is set for HOME.  
The and symbols indicate whether there is more  
history in the HOME display. Press the  
scroll in the HOME display.  
and  
to  
N O T E  
This user’s guide contains images from the HP 39gs and  
does not display the menu key label.  
1-2  
Getting started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Annunciators. Annunciators are symbols that appear  
above the title bar and give you important status  
information.  
Annunciator  
Description  
Shift in effect for next keystroke.  
To cancel, press  
again.  
α
Alpha in effect for next keystroke.  
To cancel, press  
Low battery power.  
Busy.  
again.  
(())  
Data is being transferred via  
infrared or cable.  
The keyboard  
Menu keys  
HP 39gs  
Graphing Calculator  
Menu Key  
Labels  
Menu Keys  
Cursor  
Keys  
Aplet Control  
Keys  
Alpha Key  
Shift Key  
Enter  
Key  
Getting started  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
On the calculator keyboard, the top row of keys are  
called menu keys. Their meanings depend on the  
context—that’s why their tops are blank. The menu  
keys are sometimes called “soft keys.  
The bottom line of the display shows the labels for the  
menu keys’ current meanings.  
Aplet control keys  
The aplet control keys are:  
Key  
Meaning  
Displays the Symbolic view for the  
current aplet. See “Symbolic view”  
on page 1-16.  
Displays the Plot view for the current  
aplet. See “Plot view” on page 1-16.  
Displays the Numeric view for the  
current aplet. See “Numeric view” on  
page 1-17.  
Displays the HOME view. See  
“HOME” on page 1-1.  
Displays the Aplet Library menu. See  
“Aplet library” on page 1-16.  
Displays the VIEWS menu. See  
“Aplet views” on page 1-16.  
1-4  
Getting started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Entry/Edit keys  
The entry and edit keys are:  
Key  
Meaning  
Cancels the current operation if the  
(CANCEL)  
calculator is on by pressing  
.
Pressing  
, then OFF turns the  
calculator off.  
Accesses the function printed in blue  
above a key.  
Returns to the HOME view, for  
performing calculations.  
Accesses the alphabetical  
characters printed in orange below  
a key. Hold down to enter a string  
of characters.  
Enters an input or executes an  
operation. In calculations,  
acts like “=”. When  
or  
is present as a menu key,  
acts the same as pressing  
.
or  
Enters a negative number. To enter  
–25, press  
25. Note: this is not  
the same operation that the subtract  
button performs ( ).  
Enters the independent variable by  
inserting X, T, θ, or N into the edit  
line, depending on the current  
active aplet.  
Deletes the character under the  
cursor. Acts as a backspace key if  
the cursor is at the end of the line.  
Clears all data on the screen. On a  
settings screen, for example Plot  
CLEAR  
Setup,  
CLEAR returns all  
settings to their default values.  
Moves the cursor around the  
,
,
,
display. Press  
first to move to  
the beginning, end, top or bottom.  
Getting started  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Key  
Meaning (Continued)  
CHARS  
Displays a menu of all available  
characters. To type one, use the  
arrow keys to highlight it, and press  
. To select multiple characters,  
select each and press  
press  
, then  
.
Shifted keystrokes  
There are two shift keys that you use to access the  
operations and characters printed above the keys:  
and  
.
Key  
Description  
Press the  
key to access the  
operations printed in blue above the  
keys. For instance, to access the  
Modes screen, press  
, then  
press  
. (MODES is labeled in  
blue above the  
not need to hold down  
key). You do  
when  
you press HOME. This action is  
depicted in this manual as “press  
MODES.”  
To cancel a shift, press  
again.  
The alphabetic keys are also shifted  
keystrokes. For instance, to type Z,  
press  
Z. (The letters are  
printed in orange to the lower right of  
each key.)  
To cancel Alpha, press  
again.  
For a lower case letter, press  
.
For a string of letters, hold down  
while typing.  
1-6  
Getting started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
HELPWITH  
Example  
The HP 39gs built-in help is available in HOME only. It  
provides syntax help for built-in math functions.  
Access the HELPWITH command by pressing  
SYNTAX and then the math key for which you require  
syntax help.  
Press  
SYNTAX  
Note: Remove the left parenthesis from built-in  
functions such as sine, cosine, and tangent before  
invoking the HELPWITH command.  
Math keys  
HOME (  
) is the place to do calculations.  
Keyboard keys. The most common operations are  
available from the keyboard, such as the arithmetic (like  
) and trigonometric (like  
to complete the operation:  
displays 16.  
) functions. Press  
256  
.
MATH menu. Press  
to open the MATH  
menu. The MATH menu is a  
comprehensive list of math  
functions that do not appear  
on the keyboard. It also  
includes categories for all other functions and constants.  
The functions are grouped by category, ranging in  
alphabetical order from Calculus to Trigonometry.  
The arrow keys scroll through the list (  
and move from the category list in the left column  
to the item list in the right column ( ).  
,
)
,
Press  
to insert the selected command onto the  
edit line.  
Press  
to dismiss the MATH menu without  
selecting a command.  
Pressing  
displays the list of Program  
Constants. You can use these in programs that  
you develop.  
Getting started  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Pressing  
displays a menu of physical  
constants from the fields of chemistry, physics,  
and quantum mechanics. You can use these  
constants in calculations. (See “Physical  
constants” on page 13-25 for more information.)  
Pressing  
takes you to the beginning of the  
MATH menu.  
See “Math functions by category” on page 13-2 for  
details of the math functions.  
H I N T  
When using the MATH menu, or any menu on the  
hp 39gs, pressing an alpha key takes you straight to the  
first menu option beginning with that alpha character.  
With this method, you do not need to press  
first.  
Just press the key that corresponds to the command’s  
beginning alpha character.  
Program  
commands  
Pressing  
CMDS displays the list of Program  
Commands. See “Programming commands” on  
page 18-13.  
Inactive keys  
If you press a key that does not operate in the current  
context, a warning symbol like this  
no beep.  
appears. There is  
!
Menus  
A menu offers you a choice  
of items. Menus are  
displayed in one or two  
columns.  
The  
arrow in the  
display means more  
items below.  
The  
arrow in the  
display means more items above.  
To search a menu  
Press  
or  
or  
to scroll through the list. If you press  
, you’ll go all the way to  
the end or the beginning of the list. Highlight the item  
you want to select, then press  
(or  
).  
1-8  
Getting started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
If there are two columns, the left column shows  
general categories and the right column shows  
specific contents within a category. Highlight a  
general category in the left column, then highlight an  
item in the right column. The list in the right column  
changes when a different category is highlighted.  
Press  
or  
when you have highlighted your  
selection.  
To speed-search a list, type the first letter of the word.  
For example, to find the Matrix category in  
press , the Alpha “M” key.  
,
To go up a page, you can press  
down a page, press  
. To go  
.
To cancel a menu  
Press  
(for CANCEL) or  
. This cancels the  
current operation.  
Input forms  
An input form shows several fields of information for you  
to examine and specify. After highlighting the field to  
edit, you can enter or edit a number (or expression). You  
can also select options from a list (  
forms include items to check (  
examples input forms.  
). Some input  
). See below for  
Reset input form  
values  
To reset a field to its default values in an input form, move  
the cursor to that field and press  
. To reset all default  
field values in the input form, press  
CLEAR.  
Getting started  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Mode settings  
You use the Modes input form to set the modes for HOME.  
H I N T  
Although the numeric setting in Modes affects only  
HOME, the angle setting controls HOME and the current  
aplet. The angle setting selected in Modes is the angle  
setting used in both HOME and current aplet. To further  
configure an aplet, you use the SETUP keys (  
and  
).  
Press  
form.  
MODES to access the HOME MODES input  
Setting  
Options  
Angle  
Measure  
Angle values are:  
Degrees. 360 degrees in a circle.  
Radians. 2π radians in a circle.  
Grads. 400 grads in a circle.  
The angle mode you set is the angle  
setting used in both HOME and the  
current aplet. This is done to ensure  
that trigonometric calculations done in  
the current aplet and HOME give the  
same result.  
Number  
Format  
The number format mode you set is the  
number format used in both HOME  
and the current aplet.  
Standard. Full-precision display.  
Fixed. Displays results rounded to a  
number of decimal places. Example:  
123.456789 becomes 123.46 in  
Fixed 2 format.  
Scientific. Displays results with an  
exponent, one digit to the left of the  
decimal point, and the specified  
number of decimal places. Example:  
123.456789 becomes 1.23E2 in  
Scientific 2 format.  
1-10  
Getting started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Setting  
Options (Continued)  
Engineering. Displays result with an  
the specified number of significant  
digits beyond the first one. Example:  
123.456E7 becomes 1.23E9 in  
Engineering 2 format.  
Fraction. Displays results as fractions  
based on the specified number of  
decimal places. Examples:  
123.456789 becomes 123 in  
Fraction 2 format, and .333 becomes  
1/3 and 0.142857 becomes 1/7.  
See “Using fractions” on page 1-25.  
Mixed Fraction. Displays results as  
mixed fractions based on the specified  
number of decimal places. A mixed  
fraction has an integer part and a  
fractional part. Examples:  
123.456789 becomes 123+16/35  
in Fraction 2 format, and 7÷ 3 returns  
2+1/3. See “Using fractions” on  
page 1-25.  
Decimal  
Mark  
Dot or Comma. Displays a number  
as 12456.98 (Dot mode) or as  
12456,98 (Comma mode). Dot mode  
uses commas to separate elements in  
lists and matrices, and to separate  
function arguments. Comma mode  
uses periods (dot) as separators in  
these contexts.  
Setting a mode  
This example demonstrates how to change the angle  
measure from the default mode, radians, to degrees for  
the current aplet. The procedure is the same for changing  
number format and decimal mark modes.  
1. Press  
form.  
MODES to open the HOME MODES input  
Getting started  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
The cursor (highlight) is  
in the first field, Angle  
Measure.  
2. Press  
to display a  
list of choices.  
3. Press  
to select  
Degrees,and press  
. The angle measure  
changes to degrees.  
4. Press  
HOME.  
to return to  
H I N T  
Whenever an input form has a list of choices for a field,  
you can press  
to cycle through them instead of using  
.
Aplets (E-lessons)  
Aplets are the application environments where you  
explore different classes of mathematical operations. You  
select the aplet that you want to work with.  
Aplets come from a variety of sources:  
Built-in the HP 39gs (initial purchase).  
Aplets created by saving existing aplets, which have  
been modified, with specific configurations. See  
“Creating new aplets based on existing aplets” on  
page 19-1.  
Downloaded from HP’s Calculators web site.  
Copied from another calculator.  
Aplets are stored in the Aplet  
library. See “Aplet library”  
on page 1-16 for further  
information.  
You can modify  
configuration settings for the graphical, tabular, and  
1-12  
Getting started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
symbolic views of the aplets in the following table. See  
“Aplet view configuration” on page 1-18 for further  
information.  
Aplet  
name  
Use this aplet to explore:  
Function  
Real-valued, rectangular functions y in  
terms of x. Example: y = 2x2 + 3x + 5 .  
Inference  
Confidence intervals and Hypothesis  
tests based on the Normal and  
Students-t distributions.  
Parametric Parametric relations x and y in terms of  
t. Example: x = cos(t) and y = sin(t).  
Polar  
Polar functions r in terms of an angle θ.  
Example: r = 2cos(4θ) .  
Sequence  
Sequence functions U in terms of n, or  
in terms of previous terms in the same or  
another sequence, such as Un – 1 and  
Un – 2 . Example: U1 = 0 , U2 = 1  
and Un = Un – 2 + Un – 1  
.
Solve  
Equations in one or more real-valued  
variables. Example: x + 1 = x2 x – 2 .  
Finance  
Time Value of Money (TVM)  
calculations.  
Linear  
Solver  
Solutions to sets of two or three linear  
equations.  
Triangle  
Solver  
Unknown values for the lengths and  
angles of triangles.  
Statistics  
One-variable (x) or two-variable (x and  
y) statistical data.  
In addition to these aplets, which can be used in a variety  
of applications, the HP 39gs is supplied with two  
teaching aplets: Quad Explorer and Trig Explorer. You  
cannot modify configuration settings for these aplets.  
A great many more teaching aplets can be found at HP’s  
web site and other web sites created by educators,  
together with accompanying documentation, often with  
student work sheets. These can be downloaded free of  
Getting started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-13  
charge and transferred to the HP 39gs using the provided  
Connectivity Kit.  
Quad Explorer  
aplet  
The Quad Explorer aplet is used to investigate the  
behaviour of y = a(x + h)2 + v as the values of a, h and  
v change, both by manipulating the equation and seeing  
the change in the graph, and by manipulating the graph  
and seeing the change in the equation.  
H I N T  
More detailed documentation, and an accompanying  
student work sheet can be found at HP’s web site.  
Press  
, select Quad  
Explorer, and then press  
. The Quad Explorer  
aplet opens in  
mode, in which the arrow  
keys, the  
and the  
and  
keys,  
key are used to change the shape of the  
graph. This changing shape is reflected in the equation  
displayed at the top right corner of the screen, while the  
original graph is retained for comparison. In this mode  
the graph controls the equation.  
It is also possible to have the  
equation control the graph.  
Pressing  
displays a  
sub-expression of your  
equation.  
Pressing the  
expressions, while pressing the  
their values.  
and  
key moves between sub-  
and  
key changes  
Pressing  
allows the user to select whether all three  
sub-expressions will be explored at once or only one at a  
time.  
A
button is provided to  
evaluate the student’s  
knowledge. Pressing  
displays a target quadratic  
graph. The student must  
manipulate the equation’s parameters to make the  
equation match the target graph. When a student feels  
that they have correctly chosen the parameters a  
button evaluates the answer and provide feedback. An  
button is provided for those who give up!  
1-14  
Getting started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trig Explorer aplet  
The Trig Explorer aplet is used to investigate the  
behaviour of the graph of y = asin(bx + c) + d as the  
values of a, b, c and d change, both by manipulating the  
equation and seeing the change in the graph, or by  
manipulating the graph and seeing the change in the  
equation.  
Press  
, select Trig  
Explorer, and then press  
to display the screen  
shown right.  
In this mode, the graph  
controls the equation.  
Pressing the  
keys transforms the  
graph, with these  
transformations reflected in the equation.  
and  
The button labelled  
a toggle between  
is  
Origin  
and  
is chosen, the ‘point of  
control’ is at the origin (0,0)  
and the and  
keys control vertical and  
horizontal transformations. When  
. When  
is chosen the  
‘point of control’ is on the first extremum of the graph (i.e.  
for the sine graph at (π ⁄ 2,1) .  
The arrow keys change the  
Extremum  
amplitude and frequency of  
the graph. This is most easily  
seen by experimenting.  
Pressing  
displays the  
equation at the top of the  
screen. The equation is  
controlled by the graph.  
Pressing the  
and  
keys moves from parameter  
to parameter. Pressing the  
parameter’s values.  
or  
key changes the  
The default angle setting for this aplet is radians. The  
angle setting can be changed to degrees by pressing  
.
Getting started  
1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Aplet library  
Aplets are stored in the Aplet library.  
To open an aplet  
Press  
aplet and press  
to display the Aplet library menu. Select the  
or  
.
From within an aplet, you can return to HOME any time  
by pressing  
.
Aplet views  
When you have configured an aplet to define the relation  
or data that you want to explore, you can display it in  
different views. Here are illustrations of the three major  
aplet views (Symbolic, Plot, and Numeric), the six  
supporting aplet views (from the VIEWS menu), and the  
two user-defined views (Note and Sketch).  
Note: some aplets—such as the Linear Solver aplet and  
the Triangle Solver aplet—only have a single view, the  
Numeric view.  
Symbolic view  
Plot view  
Press  
to display the aplet’s Symbolic view.  
You use this view to define  
the function(s) or equation(s)  
that you want to explore.  
See “About the Symbolic  
view” on page 2-1 for  
further information.  
Press  
to display the aplet’s Plot view.  
In this view, the functions that  
you have defined are  
displayed graphically.  
See “About the Plot view” on  
page 2-5 for further  
information.  
1-16  
Getting started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Numeric view  
Press  
to display the aplet’s Numeric view.  
In this view, the functions that  
you have defined are  
displayed in tabular format.  
See “About the numeric  
view” on page 2-16 for  
further information.  
Plot-Table view  
The VIEWS menu contains the Plot-Table view.  
Select Plot-Table  
Splits the screen into the plot  
and the data table. See  
“Other views for scaling and  
splitting the graph” on  
page 2-13 for futher information.  
Plot-Detail view  
The VIEWS menu contains the Plot-Detail view.  
Select Plot-Detail  
Splits the screen into the plot  
and a close-up.  
Overlay Plot  
view  
The VIEWS menu contains the Overlay Plot view.  
Select Overlay Plot  
Plots the current  
expression(s)withouterasing  
any pre-existing plot(s).  
See “Other views for scaling and splitting the graph” on  
page 2-13 for further information.  
Getting started  
1-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Note view  
Press  
NOTE to display the aplet’s note view.  
This note is transferred with  
the aplet if it is sent to  
another calculator or to a  
PC. A note view contains text  
to supplement an aplet.  
See “Notes and sketches” on page 17-1 for further  
information.  
Sketch view  
Press  
SKETCH to display the aplet’s sketch view.  
Displays pictures to  
supplement an aplet.  
See “Notes and sketches” on  
page 17-1 for further  
information.  
Aplet view configuration  
You use the SETUP keys (  
, and  
) to configure the aplet. For example, press  
SETUP-PLOT (  
) to display the input form for  
setting the aplet’s plot settings. Angle measure is  
controlled using the MODES view.  
Plot Setup  
Press  
SETUP-PLOT.  
Sets parameters to plot a  
graph.  
Numeric Setup  
Symbolic Setup  
Press  
SETUP-NUM. Sets  
parameters for building a  
table of numeric values.  
This view is only available in  
the Statistics aplet in  
mode, where it plays an  
important role in choosing  
data models.  
Press  
SETUP-SYMB.  
1-18  
Getting started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
To change views  
Each view is a separate environment. To change a view,  
select a different view by pressing  
keys or select a view from the VIEWS menu. To change  
to HOME, press . You do not explicitly close the  
,
,
current view, you just enter another one—like passing  
from one room into another in a house. Data that you  
enter is automatically saved as you enter it.  
To save aplet  
configuration  
You can save an aplet configuration that you have used,  
“Creating new aplets based on existing aplets” on  
page 19-1.  
Mathematical calculations  
The most commonly used math operations are available  
from the keyboard. Access to the rest of the math  
functions is via the MATH menu ( ).  
To access programming commands, press  
CMDS.  
See “Programming commands” on page 18-13 for  
further information.  
Where to start  
The home base for the calculator is the HOME view  
(
). You can do all calculations here, and you can  
access all  
operations.  
Entering  
expressions  
Enter an expression into the HP 39gs in the same left-  
to-right order that you would write the expression.  
This is called algebraic entry.  
To enter functions, select the key or MATH menu item  
for that function. You can also enter a function by  
using the Alpha keys to spell out its name.  
Press  
to evaluate the expression you have in  
the edit line (where the blinking cursor is). An  
expression can contain numbers, functions, and  
variables.  
Getting started  
1-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
232 – 14 8  
---------------------------  
Example  
Calculate  
ln(45) :  
–3  
23  
14  
8
3
45  
Long results  
If the result is too long to fit on the display line, or if you  
want to see an expression in textbook format, press  
to highlight it and then press  
.
Negative  
numbers  
Type  
to start a negative number or to insert a  
negative sign.  
To raise a negative number to a power, enclose it in  
parentheses. For example, (–5) = 25, whereas –5 =  
–25.  
2
2
Scientific  
A number like 5 × 104 or 3.21 × 10–7 is written in  
scientific notation, that is, in terms of powers of ten. This  
is simpler to work with than 50000 or 0.000000321. To  
enter numbers like these, use EEX. (This is easier than  
notation  
(powers of 10)  
using  
10  
.)  
(4 × 10–13)(6 × 1023  
)
----------------------------------------------------  
Example  
Calculate  
3 × 10–5  
4
EEX  
13  
6
EEX  
EEX  
23  
3
5
Explicit and  
implicit  
multiplication  
Implied multiplication takes place when two operands  
appear with no operator in between. If you enter AB, for  
example, the result is A*B.  
1-20  
Getting started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
However, for clarity, it is better to include the  
multiplication sign where you expect multiplication in an  
expression. It is clearest to enter ABas A*B.  
H I N T  
Implied multiplication will not always work as expected.  
For example, entering A(B+4)will not give A*(B+4).  
Instead an error message is displayed: “Invalid User  
Function”. This is because the calculator interprets  
A(B+4)as meaning ‘evaluate function Aat the value  
B+4’, and function Adoes not exist. When in doubt, insert  
the * sign manually.  
Parentheses  
You need to use parentheses to enclose arguments for  
functions, such as SIN(45). You can omit the final  
parenthesis at the end of an edit line. The calculator  
inserts it automatically.  
Parentheses are also important in specifying the order of  
operation. Without parentheses, the HP 39gs calculates  
according to the order of algebraic precedence (the next  
topic). Following are some examples using parentheses.  
Entering...  
45  
Calculates...  
sin (45 + π)  
sin (45) + π  
85 × 9  
π
45  
π
85  
9
85  
9
85 × 9  
Getting started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-21  
     
Algebraic  
precedence  
order of  
Functions within an expression are evaluated in the  
following order of precedence. Functions with the same  
precedence are evaluated in order from left to right.  
1. Expressions within parentheses. Nested parentheses  
are evaluated from inner to outer.  
evaluation  
2. Prefix functions, such as SIN and LOG.  
3. Postfix functions, such as !  
4. Power function, ^, NTHROOT.  
5. Negation, multiplication, and division.  
6. Addition and subtraction.  
7. AND and NOT.  
8. OR and XOR.  
9. Left argument of | (where).  
10.Equals, =.  
Largest and  
smallest  
numbers  
The smallest number the HP 39gs can represent is  
–499  
1 × 10  
(1E–499). A smaller result is displayed as  
499  
zero. The largest number is 9.99999999999 × 10  
(1E499). A greater result is displayed as this number.  
Clearing  
numbers  
clears the character under the cursor. When the  
cursor is positioned after the last character,  
deletes the character to the left of the cursor, that is, it  
performs the same as a backspace key.  
CANCEL (  
) clears the edit line.  
CLEAR clears all input and output in the  
display, including the display history.  
Using previous  
results  
The HOME display (  
) shows you four lines of  
input/output history. An unlimited (except by memory)  
number of previous lines can be displayed by scrolling.  
You can retrieve and reuse any of these values or  
expressions.  
Input  
Output  
Last input  
Last output  
Edit line  
1-22  
Getting started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
When you highlight a previous input or result (by pressing  
), the and menu labels appear.  
To copy a previous  
line  
Highlight the line (press  
) and press  
. The  
number (or expression) is copied into the edit line.  
To reuse the last  
result  
Press  
ANS (last answer) to put the last result from the  
HOME display into an expression. ANS is a variable that  
is updated each time you press  
.
To repeat a  
previous line  
To repeat the very last line, just press  
. Otherwise,  
highlight the line (press  
) first, and then press  
.
The highlighted expression or number is re-entered. If the  
previous line is an expression containing the ANS, the  
calculation is repeated iteratively.  
Example  
See how  
(50), and  
ANS retrieves and reuses the last result  
updates ANS (from 50 to 75 to 100).  
50  
25  
You can use the last result as the first expression in the edit  
line without pressing ANS. Pressing , or  
,
,
, (or other operators that require a preceding  
argument) automatically enters ANS before the operator.  
You can reuse any other expression or value in the HOME  
display by highlighting the expression (using the arrow  
keys), then pressing  
. See “Using previous results”  
on page 1-22 for more details.  
The variable ANS is different from the numbers in HOME’s  
display history. A value in ANS is stored internally with the  
full precision of the calculated result, whereas the  
displayed numbers match the display mode.  
Getting started  
1-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
H I N T  
When you retrieve a number from ANS, you obtain the  
result to its full precision. When you retrieve a number  
from the HOME’s display history, you obtain exactly what  
was displayed.  
Pressing  
whereas pressing  
into the edit line.  
evaluates (or re-evaluates) the last input,  
ANS copies the last result (as ANS)  
Storing a value  
in a variable  
You can save an answer in a variable and use the  
variable in later calculations. There are 27 variables  
available for storing real values. These are A to Z and θ.  
See Chapter 14, “Variables and memory management”  
for more information on variables. For example:  
1. Perform a calculation.  
45  
8
3
2. Store the result in the A variable.  
A
3. Perform another calculation using the A variable.  
95  
2
A
1-24  
Getting started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Accessing the  
display history  
Pressing  
enables the highlight bar in the display  
history. While the highlight bar is active, the following  
menu and keyboard keys are very useful:  
Key  
Function  
,
Scrolls through the display history.  
Copies the highlighted expression to  
the position of the cursor in the edit line.  
Displays the current expression in  
standard mathematical form.  
Deletes the highlighted expression from  
the display history, unless there is a  
cursor in the edit line.  
Clears all lines of display history and  
the edit line.  
CLEAR  
Clearing the  
display history  
It’s a good habit to clear the display history (  
CLEAR) whenever you have finished working in HOME. It  
saves calculator memory to clear the display history.  
Remember that all your previous inputs and results are  
saved until you clear them.  
Using fractions  
To work with fractions in HOME, you set the number  
format to Fractionor Mixed Fraction, as follows:  
Setting Fraction  
mode  
1. In HOME, open the HOME MODES input form.  
MODES  
Getting started  
1-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2. Select Number Format, press  
to display the  
options, and highlight Fractionor Mixed  
Fraction.  
3. Press  
to select the Number Format option, then  
move to the precision value field.  
4. Enter the precision value that you want to use, and  
press  
to HOME.  
to set the precision. Press  
to return  
See “Setting fraction precision” below for more  
information.  
Setting fraction  
precision  
The fraction precision setting determines the precision in  
which the HP 39gs converts a decimal value to a fraction.  
The greater the precision value that is set, the closer the  
fraction is to the decimal value.  
By choosing a precision of 1 you are saying that the  
fraction only has to match 0.234 to at least 1 decimal  
place (3/13 is 0.23076...).  
The fractions used are found using the technique of  
continued fractions.  
When converting recurring decimals this can be  
important. For example, at precision 6 the decimal  
0.6666 becomes 3333/5000 (6666/10000) whereas  
at precision 3, 0.6666 becomes 2/3, which is probably  
what you would want.  
For example, when converting .234 to a fraction, the  
precision value has the following effect:  
1-26  
Getting started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Precision set to 1:  
Precision set to 2:  
Precision set to 3:  
Precision set to 4  
Fraction  
calculations  
When entering fractions:  
You use the  
key to separate the numerator part  
and the denominator part of the fraction.  
1
To enter a mixed fraction, for example, 1 / , you  
2
1
enter it in the format (1+ / ).  
2
For example, to perform the following calculation:  
3
7
3(2 / + 5 / )  
4
8
1. Set the Number format mode to Fractionor  
Mixed Fractionand specify a precision value of  
4.In this example, we’ll select Fractionas our  
format.)  
MODES  
Select  
Fraction  
4
Getting started  
1-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Enter the calculation.  
3
2
3
4
8
5
7
Note: Ensure you are in  
the HOME view.  
3. Evaluate the calculation.  
Note that if you had  
selected Mixed  
Fractioninstead of  
Fractionas the  
Number format, the answer would have been  
expressed as 25+7/8.  
Converting  
decimals to  
fractions  
To convert a decimal value to a fraction:  
1. Set the number format mode to Fraction or Mixed  
Fraction.  
2. Either retrieve the value from the History, or enter the  
value on the command line.  
3. Press  
to convert the number to a fraction.  
When converting a decimal to a fraction, keep the  
following points in mind:  
When converting a recurring decimal to a fraction,  
set the fraction precision to about 6, and ensure that  
you include more than six decimal places in the  
recurring decimal that you enter.  
In this example, the  
fraction precision is set  
to 6. The top  
calculation returns the  
correct result. The  
bottom one does not.  
To convert an exact decimal to a fraction, set the  
fraction precision to at least two more than the  
number of decimal places in the decimal.  
1-28  
Getting started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In this example, the  
fraction precision is set  
to 6.  
Complex numbers  
Complex results  
The HP 39gs can return a complex number as a result for  
some math functions. A complex number appears as an  
ordered pair (x, y), where x is the real part and y is the  
imaginary part. For example, entering –1 returns (0,1).  
To enter complex  
numbers  
Enter the number in either of these forms, where x is the  
real part, y is the imaginary part, and i is the imaginary  
constant, –1 :  
(x, y) or  
x + iy.  
To enter i:  
press  
or  
press  
,
or  
keys to select Constant,  
to  
to move to the right column of the menu,  
select i, and  
.
Storing complex  
numbers  
There are 10 variables available for storing complex  
numbers: Z0 to Z9. To store a complex number in a  
variable:  
Enter the complex number, press  
, enter the  
variable to store the number in, and press  
.
4
5
Z 0  
Getting started  
1-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Catalogs and editors  
The HP 39gs has several catalogs and editors. You use  
them to create and manipulate objects. They access  
features and stored values (numbers or text or other items)  
that are independent of aplets.  
A catalog lists items, which you can delete or  
transmit, for example an aplet.  
An editor lets you create or modify items and  
numbers, for example a note or a matrix.  
Catalog/Editor  
Contents  
Aplet library  
Aplets.  
(
)
Sketch editor  
Sketches and diagrams, See  
Chapter 17, “Notes and  
sketches”.  
(
SKETCH)  
Lists. In HOME, lists are  
enclosed in {}. See Chapter 16,  
“Lists”.  
List (  
LIST)  
One- and two-dimensional  
arrays. In HOME, arrays are  
enclosed in []. See Chapter 15,  
“Matrices”.  
Matrix (  
MATRIX)  
Notes (short text entries). See  
Chapter 17, “Notes and  
sketches”.  
Notepad (  
NOTEPAD)  
Programs that you create, or  
associated with user-defined  
aplets. See Chapter 18,  
“Programming”.  
Program (  
PROGRM)  
1-30  
Getting started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
Aplets and their views  
Aplet views  
This section examines the options and functionality of the  
three main views for the Function, Polar, Parametric, and  
Sequence aplets: Symbolic, Plot, and Numeric views.  
About the Symbolic view  
The Symbolic view is the defining view for the Function,  
Parametric, Polar, and Sequence aplets. The other views  
are derived from the symbolic expression.  
You can create up to 10 different definitions for each  
Function, Parametric, Polar, and Sequence aplet. You  
can graph any of the relations (in the same aplet)  
simultaneously by selecting them.  
Defining an expression (Symbolic view)  
Choose the aplet from the Aplet Library.  
Press  
or  
to  
select an aplet.  
The Function,  
Parametric, Polar, and Sequence aplets start in the  
Symbolic view.  
If the highlight is on an existing expression, scroll to  
an empty line—unless you don’t mind writing over the  
expression—or, clear one line (  
) or all lines  
(
CLEAR).  
Expressions are selected (check marked) on entry. To  
deselect an expression, press  
expressions are plotted.  
. Allselected  
Aplets and their views  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-1  
       
For a Function  
definition, enter  
an expression to  
define F(X). The  
only independent  
variable in the  
expression is X.  
For a  
Parametric  
definition, enter  
a pair of  
expressions to  
define X(T) and  
Y(T). The only  
independent variable in the expressions is T.  
For a Polar  
definition, enter  
an expression to  
define R(θ). The  
only independent  
variable in the  
expression is θ.  
For a Sequence  
definition, either  
enter the first term,  
or the first and  
second terms, for U  
(U1, or...U9, or  
U0). Then define  
the nth term of the sequence in terms of N or of  
the prior terms, U(N–1) and/or U(N–2). The  
expressions should produce real-valued  
sequences with integer domains. Or define the  
nth term as a non-recursive expression in terms of  
n only. In this case, the calculator inserts the first  
two terms based on the expression that you  
define.  
Note: You will have to enter the second term if  
the hp39gs is unable to calculate it automatically.  
Typically if Ux(N) depends on Ux(N–2) then you  
must enter Ux(2).  
2-2  
Aplets and their views  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Evaluating expressions  
In aplets  
In the Symbolic view, a variable is a symbol only, and  
does not represent one specific value. To evaluate a  
function in Symbolic view, press . If a function calls  
another function, then resolves all references to  
other functions in terms of their independent variable.  
1. Choose the Function  
aplet.  
Select Function  
2. Enter the expressions in the Function aplet’s Symbolic  
view.  
A
B
F1  
F2  
3. Highlight F3(X).  
4. Press  
Note how the values  
for F1(X) and F2(X) are  
substituted into F3(X).  
Aplets and their views  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In HOME  
You can also evaluate any expression in HOME by  
entering it into the edit line and pressing  
.
For example, define F4 as below. In HOME, type  
F4(9)and press . This evaluates the expression,  
substituting 9in place of Xinto F4.  
SYMB view keys The following table details the menu keys that you use to  
work with the Symbolic view.  
Key  
Meaning  
Copies the highlighted expression to  
the edit line for editing. Press  
when done.  
Checks/unchecks the current  
expression (or set of expressions).  
Only checked expression(s) are  
evaluated in the Plot and Numeric  
views.  
Enters the independent variable in the  
Function aplet. Or, you can use the  
key on the keyboard.  
Enters the independent variable in the  
Parametric aplet. Or, you can use the  
key on the keyboard.  
Enters the independent variable in the  
Polar aplet. Or, you can use the  
key on the keyboard.  
Enters the independent variable in the  
Sequence aplet. Or, you can use the  
key on the keyboard.  
Displays the current expression in text  
book form.  
Resolves all references to other  
definitions in terms of variables and  
evaluates all arithmetic expressions.  
Displays a menu for entering variable  
names or contents of variables.  
2-4  
Aplets and their views  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Key  
Meaning (Continued)  
Displays the menu for entering math  
operations.  
CHARS  
Displays special characters. To enter  
one, place the cursor on it and press  
. To remain in the CHARS menu  
and enter another special character,  
press  
.
Deletes the highlighted expression or  
the current character in the edit line.  
CLEAR  
Deletes all expressions in the list or  
clears the edit line.  
About the Plot view  
After entering and selecting (check marking) the  
expression in the Symbolic view, press  
. To adjust  
the appearance of the graph or the interval that is  
displayed, you can change the Plot view settings.  
You can plot up to ten expressions at the same time.  
Select the expressions you want to be plotted together.  
Setting up the plot (Plot view setup)  
Press  
SETUP-PLOT to define any of the settings  
shown in the next two tables.  
1. Highlight the field to edit.  
If there is a number to enter, type it in and press  
or  
.
If there is an option to choose, press  
highlight your choice, and press  
,
or  
.
As a shortcut to  
change and press  
options.  
, just highlight the field to  
to cycle through the  
If there is an option to select or deselect, press  
to check or uncheck it.  
2. Press  
to view more settings.  
to view the new plot.  
3. When done, press  
Aplets and their views  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-5  
     
Plot view  
settings  
The plot view settings are:  
Field  
Meaning  
XRNG, YRNG  
Specifies the minimum and  
maximum horizontal (X) and  
vertical (Y) values for the plotting  
window.  
RES  
For function plots: Resolution;  
“Faster” plots in alternate pixel  
columns; “Detail” plots in every  
pixel column.  
TRNG  
θRNG  
Parametric aplet: Specifies the t-  
values (T) for the graph.  
Polar aplet: Specifies the angle (θ)  
value range for the graph.  
NRNG  
TSTEP  
θSTEP  
Sequence aplet: Specifies the  
index (N) values for the graph.  
For Parametric plots: the increment  
for the independent variable.  
For Polar plots: the increment  
value for the independent  
variable.  
SEQPLOT  
For Sequence aplet: Stairstep or  
Cobweb types.  
XTICK  
YTICK  
Horizontal spacing for tickmarks.  
Vertical spacing for tickmarks.  
Those items with space for a checkmark are settings you  
can turn on or off. Press  
page.  
to display the second  
Field  
Meaning  
SIMULT  
If more than one relation is being  
plotted, plots them simultaneously  
(otherwise sequentially).  
INV. CROSS  
Cursor crosshairs invert the status  
of the pixels they cover.  
2-6  
Aplets and their views  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Field  
Meaning (Continued)  
CONNECT  
Connect the plotted points. (The  
Sequence aplet always connects  
them.)  
LABELS  
Label the axes with XRNGand  
YRNGvalues.  
AXES  
GRID  
Draw the axes.  
Draw grid points using XTICK  
and YTICKspacing.  
Reset plot  
settings  
To reset the default values for all plot settings, press  
CLEAR in the Plot Setup view. To reset the default  
value for a field, highlight the field, and press  
.
Exploring the graph  
Plot view gives you a selection of keys and menu keys to  
explore a graph further. The options vary from aplet to  
aplet.  
PLOT view keys  
The following table details the keys that you use to work  
with the graph.  
Key  
Meaning  
CLEAR  
Erases the plot and axes.  
Offers additional pre-defined views  
for splitting the screen and for scaling  
(“zooming”) the axes.  
Moves cursor to far left or far right.  
Moves cursor between relations.  
Interrupts plotting.  
or  
Continues plotting if interrupted.  
Aplets and their views  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Key  
Meaning (Continued)  
Turns menu-key labels on and off.  
When the labels are off, pressing  
turns them back on.  
Pressing  
once displays the  
full row of labels.  
Pressing  
a second time  
removes the row of labels to  
display only the graph.  
Pressing  
a third time  
displays the coordinate mode.  
appears over the  
on  
.
Opens an input form for you to enter  
an X (or T or N or θ) value. Enter the  
value and press  
. The cursor jumps  
to the point on the graph that you  
entered.  
Function aplet only: turns on menu list  
for root-finding functions (see  
“Analyse graph with FCN functions”  
on page 3-4).  
Displays the current, defining  
expression. Press  
menu.  
to restore the  
Trace a graph  
You can trace along a function using the  
or  
key  
which moves the cursor along the graph. The display also  
shows the current coordinate position (x, y) of the cursor.  
Trace mode and the coordinate display are automatically  
set when a plot is drawn.  
Note: Tracing might not appear to exactly follow your  
plot if the resolution (in Plot Setup view) is set to Faster.  
This is because RES: FASTER plots in only every other  
column, whereas tracing always uses every column.  
In Function and Sequence Aplets: You can also  
scroll (move the cursor) left or right beyond the edge of  
the display window in trace mode, giving you a view of  
more of the plot.  
To move between  
relations  
If there is more than one relation displayed, press  
to move between relations.  
or  
2-8  
Aplets and their views  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
To jump directly to  
a value  
To jump straight to a value rather than using the Trace  
function, use the  
a value. Press  
menu key. Press  
, then enter  
to jump to the value.  
To turn trace on/off  
If the menu labels are not displayed, press  
first.  
Turn off trace mode by pressing  
Turn on trace mode by pressing  
.
.
To turn the coordinate display off, press  
.
Zoom within a  
graph  
One of the menu key options is  
the plot on a larger or smaller scale. It is a shortcut for  
changing the Plot Setup.  
. Zooming redraws  
The Set Factors...option enables you to set the  
factors by which you zoom in or zoom out, and whether  
the zoom is centered about the cursor.  
ZOOM options  
Press  
, select an option, and press  
. (If  
is not displayed, press  
available in all aplets.  
.) Not all  
Option  
Meaning  
Center  
Re-centers the plot around the  
current position of the cursor without  
changing the scale.  
Box...  
In  
Lets you draw a box to zoom in on.  
See “Other views for scaling and  
splitting the graph” on page 2-13.  
Divides horizontal and vertical  
scales by the X-factor and Y-factor.  
For instance, if zoom factors are 4,  
then zooming in results in 1/4 as  
many units depicted per pixel. (see  
Set Factors...)  
Out  
Multiplies horizontal and vertical  
scales by the X-factor and Y-factor  
(see Set Factors...).  
X-Zoom In  
Divides horizontal scale only, using  
X-factor.  
X-Zoom Out  
Multiplies horizontal scale, using  
X-factor.  
Aplets and their views  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Option  
Meaning (Continued)  
Y-Zoom In  
Divides vertical scale only, using  
Y-factor.  
Y-Zoom Out  
Square  
Multiplies vertical scale only, using  
Y-factor.  
Changes the vertical scale to match  
the horizontal scale. (Use this after  
doing a Box Zoom, X-Zoom, or  
Y-Zoom.)  
Set  
Factors...  
Sets the X-Zoom and Y-Zoom factors  
for zooming in or zooming out.  
Includes option to recenter the plot  
before zooming.  
Auto Scale  
Rescales the vertical axis so that the  
display shows a representative  
piece of the plot, for the supplied x  
axis settings. (For Sequence and  
Statistics aplets, autoscaling  
rescales both axes.)  
The autoscale process uses the first  
selected function only to determine  
the best scale to use.  
Decimal  
Rescales both axes so each pixel =  
0.1 units. Resets default values for  
XRNG  
(–6.5 to 6.5) and YRNG (–3.1 to  
3.2). (Not in Sequence or Statistics  
aplets.)  
Integer  
Trig  
Rescales horizontal axis only,  
making each pixel =1 unit. (Not  
available in Sequence or Statistics  
aplets.)  
Rescales horizontal axis so  
1 pixel = π/24 radians, 7.58, or  
1
8 / grads; rescales vertical axis  
3
so  
1 pixel = 0.1 unit.  
(Not in Sequence or Statistics  
aplets.)  
2-10  
Aplets and their views  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Option  
Meaning (Continued)  
Un-zoom  
Returns the display to the previous  
zoom, or if there has been only one  
zoom, un-zoom displays the graph  
with the original plot settings.  
ZOOM examples  
The following screens show the effects of zooming options  
on a plot of 3sinx .  
Plot of 3sinx  
Zoom In:  
In  
Un-zoom:  
Un-zoom  
Note: Press  
to move to  
the bottom of the Zoom list.  
Zoom Out:  
Out  
Now un-zoom.  
X-Zoom In:  
X-Zoom In  
Now un-zoom.  
X-Zoom Out:  
X-Zoom Out  
Now un-zoom.  
Aplets and their views  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Y-Zoom In:  
Y-Zoom In  
Now un-zoom.  
Y-Zoom Out:  
Y-Zoom Out  
Zoom Square:  
Square  
To box zoom  
The Box Zoom option lets you draw a box around the  
area you want to zoom in on by selecting the endpoints  
of one diagonal of the zoom rectangle.  
1. If necessary, press  
labels.  
to turn on the menu-key  
2. Press  
3. Position the cursor on one corner of the rectangle.  
Press  
4. Use the cursor keys  
, etc.) to drag to  
the opposite corner.  
and select Box...  
.
(
5. Press  
to zoom in  
on the boxed area.  
2-12  
Aplets and their views  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To set zoom factors  
1. In the Plot view, press  
2. Press  
3. Select Set Factors...and press  
.
.
.
4. Enter the zoom factors. There is one zoom factor for  
the horizontal scale (XZOOM) and one for the vertical  
scale (YZOOM).  
Zooming out multiplies the scale by the factor, so that  
a greater scale distance appears on the screen.  
Zooming in divides the scale by the factor, so that a  
shorter scale distance appears on the screen.  
Other views for scaling and splitting the graph  
The preset viewing options menu (  
) contains  
options for drawing the plot using certain pre-defined  
configurations. This is a shortcut for changing Plot view  
settings. For instance, if you have defined a trigonometric  
function, then you could select Trigto plot your function  
on a trigonometric scale. It also contains split-screen  
options.  
In certain aplets, for example those that you download  
from the world wide web, the preset viewing options  
menu can also contain options that relate to the aplet.  
VIEWS menu  
options  
Press  
, select an option, and press  
.
Option  
Meaning  
Plot-  
Detail  
Splits the screen into the plot and a  
close-up.  
Plot-Table  
Splits the screen into the plot and  
the data table.  
Overlay  
Plot  
Plots the current expression(s)  
without erasing any pre-existing  
plot(s).  
Aplets and their views  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Option  
Meaning (Continued)  
Auto Scale  
Rescales the vertical axis so that the  
display shows a representative  
piece of the plot, for the supplied x  
axis settings. (For Sequence and  
Statistics aplets, autoscaling  
rescales both axes.)  
The autoscale process uses the first  
selected function only to determine  
the best scale to use.  
Decimal  
Rescales both axes so each pixel =  
0.1 unit. Resets default values for  
XRNG  
(–6.5 to 6.5) and YRNG (–3.1 to  
3.2). (Not in Sequence or Statistics  
aplets.)  
Integer  
Trig  
Rescales horizontal axis only,  
making each pixel=1 unit. (Not  
available in Sequence or Statistics  
aplets.)  
Rescales horizontal axis so  
1 pixel=π/24 radian, 7.58, or  
1
8 / grads; rescales vertical axis so  
3
1 pixel =0.1 unit.  
(Not in Sequence or Statistics  
aplets.)  
Split the screen  
The Plot-Detail view can give you two simultaneous views  
of the plot.  
1. Press  
. Select Plot-Detailand press  
.
The graph is plotted twice. You can now zoom in on  
the right side.  
2. Press  
,
select the zoom method  
and press  
or  
. This zooms the  
right side. Here is an  
example of split screen with Zoom In.  
The Plot menu keys are available as for the full  
plot (for tracing, coordinate display, equation  
display, and so on).  
2-14  
Aplets and their views  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
moves the leftmost cursor to the  
screen’s left edge and  
moves the  
rightmost cursor to the screen’s right edge.  
The  
plot.  
menu key copies the right plot to the left  
3. To un-split the screen, press  
over the whole screen.  
. The left side takes  
The Plot-Table view gives you two simultaneous views of  
the plot.  
1. Press  
. Select  
Plot-Tableand  
press  
. The screen  
displays the plot on the  
left side and a table of  
numbers on the right side.  
2. To move up and down the table, use the  
and  
cursor keys. These keys move the tra.ce point left or  
right along the plot, and in the table, the  
corresponding values are highlighted.  
3. To move between functions, use the  
and  
cursor keys to move the cursor from one graph to  
another.  
4. To return to a full Numeric (or Plot) view, press  
(or  
).  
Overlay plots  
If you want to plot over an existing plot without erasing  
that plot, then use Overlay Plotinstead of  
. Note that tracing follows only the current  
functions from the current aplet.  
Decimal scaling  
Integer scaling  
Decimal scaling is the default scaling. If you have  
changed the scaling to Trig or Integer, you can change it  
back with Decimal.  
Integer scaling compresses the axes so that each pixel is  
1× 1 and the origin is near the screen center.  
Trigonometric  
scaling  
Use trigonometric scaling whenever you are plotting an  
expression that includes trigonometric functions.  
Trigonometric plots are more likely to intersect the axis at  
points factored by π.  
Aplets and their views  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
About the numeric view  
Afterenteringandselecting  
(check marking) the  
expression or expressions  
that you want to explore in  
the Symbolic view, press  
to view a table of  
data values for the independent variable (X, T, θ, or N)  
and dependent variables.  
Setting up the table (Numeric view setup)  
Press  
NUM to define  
any of the table settings.  
Use the Numeric Setup  
input form to configure the  
table.  
1. Highlight the field to edit. Use the arrow keys to  
move from field to field.  
If there is a number to enter, type it in and press  
or . To modify an existing number,  
press  
.
If there is an option to choose, press  
highlight your choice, and press  
,
or  
.
Shortcut: Press the  
key to copy values  
from the Plot Setup into NUMSTARTand  
NUMSTEP. Effectively, the  
allows you to make the table match the pixel  
columns in the graph view.  
menu key  
2. When done, press  
numbers.  
to view the table of  
2-16  
Aplets and their views  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Numeric view  
settings  
The following table details the fields on the Numeric  
Setup input form.  
Field  
Meaning  
NUMSTART  
The independent variable’s  
starting value.  
NUMSTEP  
NUMTYPE  
The size of the increment from  
one independent variable value  
to the next.  
Type of numeric table: Automatic  
or Build Your Own. To build your  
own table, you must type each  
independent value into the table  
yourself.  
NUMZOOM  
Allows you to zoom in or out on a  
selected value of the independent  
variable.  
Reset numeric  
settings  
To reset the default values for all table settings, press  
CLEAR.  
Exploring the table of numbers  
NUM view  
menu keys  
The following table details the menu keys that you use to  
work with the table of numbers.  
Key  
Meaning  
Displays ZOOM menu list.  
Toggles between two character  
sizes.  
Displays the defining function  
expression for the highlighted  
column. To cancel this display, press  
.
Zoom within a  
table  
Zooming redraws the table of numbers in greater or  
lesser detail.  
Aplets and their views  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
ZOOM options  
The following table lists the zoom options:  
Option  
Meaning  
In  
Decreases the intervals for the  
independent variable so a narrower  
range is shown. Uses the NUMZOOM  
factor in Numeric Setup.  
Out  
Increases the intervals for the  
independent variable so that a  
wider range is shown. Uses the  
NUMZOOMfactor in Numeric Setup.  
Decimal  
Integer  
Trig  
Changes intervals for the  
independent variable to 0.1 units.  
Starts at zero. (Shortcut to changing  
NUMSTARTand NUMSTEP.)  
Changes intervals for the  
independent variable to 1 unit.  
Starts at zero. (Shortcut to changing  
NUMSTEP.)  
Changes intervals for independent  
variable to π/24 radian or 7.5  
1
degrees or 8 / grads. Starts at  
3
zero.  
Un-zoom  
Returns the display to the previous  
zoom.  
The display on the right is a Zoom In of the display on the  
left. The ZOOMfactor is 4.  
H I N T  
To jump to an independent variable value in the table,  
use the arrow keys to place the cursor in the independent  
variable column, then enter the value to jump to.  
Automatic  
recalculation  
You can enter any new value in the X column. When you  
press  
, the values for the dependent variables are  
recalculated, and the entire table is regenerated with the  
same interval between X values.  
2-18  
Aplets and their views  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Building your own table of numbers  
The default NUMTYPEis “Automatic”, which fills the table  
with data for regular intervals of the independent (X, T, θ,  
or N) variable. With the NUMTYPEoption set to “Build  
Your Own”, you fill the table yourself by typing in the  
independent-variable values you want. The dependent  
values are then calculated and displayed.  
Build a table  
1. Start with an expression defined (in Symbolic view) in  
the aplet of your choice. Note: Function, Polar,  
Parametric, and Sequence aplets only.  
2. In the Numeric Setup (  
NUM), choose  
NUMTYPE: Build Your Own.  
3. Open the Numeric view (  
).  
4. Clear existing data in the table (  
CLEAR).  
5. Enter the independent values in the left-hand column.  
Type in a number and press  
to enter them in order, because the  
can rearrange them. To insert a number between two  
. You do not have  
function  
others, use  
.
F1 and F2  
entries are  
generated  
automatically  
You enter  
numbers into  
the X column  
Clear data  
Press  
CLEAR,  
to erase the data from a table.  
Aplets and their views  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
“Build Your Own” menu keys  
Key  
Meaning  
Puts the highlighted independent  
value (X, T, θ, or N) into the edit  
line. Pressing  
replaces  
this variable with its current value.  
Inserts a zero value at the position  
of the highlight. Replace a zero  
by typing the number you want  
and pressing  
.
Sorts the independent variable  
values into ascending or  
descending order. Press  
and select the ascending or  
descending option from the  
menu, and press  
.
Toggles between two character  
sizes.  
Displays the defining function  
expression for the highlighted  
column.  
Deletes the highlighted row.  
Clears all data from the table.  
CLEAR  
Example: plotting a circle  
2
2
Plot the circle, x + y = 9. First rearrange it to read  
y = ± 9 – x2 .  
To plot both the positive and negative y values, you need  
to define two equations as follows:  
y = 9 x2 and y = – 9 – x2  
2-20  
Aplets and their views  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. In the Function aplet, specify the functions.  
Select  
Function  
9
9
2. Reset the graph setup to the default settings.  
SETUP-PLOT  
CLEAR  
3. Plot the two functions  
and hide the menu so  
that you can see all the  
circle.  
4. Reset the numeric setup to the default settings.  
SETUP-NUM  
CLEAR  
5. Display the functions in numeric form.  
Aplets and their views  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Function aplet  
About the Function aplet  
The Function aplet enables you to explore up to 10  
real-valued, rectangular functions y in terms of x. For  
example y = 2x + 3 .  
Once you have defined a function you can:  
create graphs to find roots, intercepts, slope, signed  
area, and extrema  
create tables to evaluate functions at particular  
values.  
This chapter demonstrates the basic tools of the Function  
aplet by stepping you through an example. See “Aplet  
views” on page 2-1 for further information about the  
functionality of the Symbolic, Numeric, and Plot views.  
Getting started with the Function aplet  
The following example involves two functions: a linear  
function y = 1 x and a quadratic equation  
y = (x + 3)2 – 2 .  
Open the  
Function aplet  
1. Open the Function aplet.  
Select Function  
The Function aplet starts  
in the Symbolic view.  
The Symbolic view is the defining view for Function,  
Parametric, Polar, and Sequence aplets. The other  
views are derived from the symbolic expression.  
Function aplet  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Define the  
expressions  
2. There are 10 function definition fields on the Function  
aplet’s Symbolic view screen. They are labeled F1(X)  
to F0(X). Highlight the function definition field you  
want to use, and enter an expression. (You can press  
to delete an existing line, or  
clear all lines.)  
CLEAR to  
1
3
2
Set up the plot  
You can change the scales of the x and y axes, graph  
resolution, and the spacing of the axis ticks.  
3. Display plot settings.  
SETUP-PLOT  
Note: For our example, you can leave the plot  
settings at their default values since we will be using  
the Auto Scale feature to choose an appropriate y  
axis for our x axis settings. If your settings do not  
match this example, press  
default values.  
CLEAR to restore the  
4. Specify a grid for the graph.  
Plot the  
functions  
5. Plot the functions.  
3-2  
Function aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Change the  
scale  
6. You can change the scale to see more or less of your  
graphs. In this example, choose Auto Scale. (See  
“VIEWS menu options” on page 2-13 for a  
description of Auto Scale).  
Select Auto  
Scale  
Trace a graph  
7. Trace the linear function.  
6 times  
Note: By default, the  
tracer is active.  
8. Jump from the linear function to the quadratic  
function.  
Function aplet  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Analyse graph  
with FCN  
functions  
9. Display the Plot view menu.  
From the Plot view menu, you can use the functions  
on the FCN menu to find roots, intersections, slopes,  
and areas for a function defined in the Function aplet  
(and any Function-based aplets). The FCN functions  
act on the currently selected graph. See “FCN  
functions” on page 3-10 for further information.  
To find a root of the  
quadratic function  
10.Move the cursor to the graph of the quadratic  
equation by pressing the  
the cursor so that it is near x = –1 by pressing the  
or key.  
or  
key. Then move  
SelectRoot  
The root value is  
displayed at the  
bottom of the screen.  
Note: If there is more  
than one root (as in our  
example), the  
coordinates of the root closest to the current cursor  
position are displayed.  
To find the  
11.Find the intersection of the two functions.  
intersection of the  
two functions  
3-4  
Function aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
12.Choose the linear function whose intersection with the  
quadratic function you wish to find.  
The coordinates of the  
intersection point are  
displayed at the  
bottom of the screen.  
Note: If there is more  
than one intersection  
(as in our example), the coordinates of the  
intersection point closest to the current cursor position  
are displayed.  
To find the slope of  
the quadratic  
function  
13.Find the slope of the quadratic function at the  
intersection point.  
Select Slope  
The slope value is  
displayed at the  
bottom of the screen.  
To find the signed  
area of the two  
functions  
14.To find the area between the two functions in the  
range –2 x –1, first move the cursor to  
F1(x) = 1 x and select the signed area option.  
Select Signedarea  
Function aplet  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
15.Move the cursor to x = –2 by pressing the  
key.  
or  
2
16.Press  
to accept using F2(x) = (x + 3) – 2 as the  
other boundary for the integral.  
17. Choose the end value  
for x.  
1
The cursor jumps to  
x = –1 on the linear  
function.  
18.Display the numerical  
value of the integral.  
Note: See “Shading  
area” on page 3-11  
for another method of  
calculating area.  
To find the  
extremum of the  
quadratic  
19.Move the cursor to the quadratic equation and find  
the extremum of the quadratic.  
Select Extremum  
The coordinates of the  
extremum are  
displayed at the  
bottom of the screen.  
3-6  
Function aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
H I N T  
The Root and Extremum functions return one value only  
even if the function has more than one root or extremum.  
The function finds the value closest to the position of the  
cursor. You need to re-locate the cursor to find other roots  
or extrema that may exist.  
Display the  
numeric view  
20.Display the numeric view.  
Set up the table  
21.Display the numeric setup.  
SETUP-NUM  
See “Setting up the table (Numeric view setup)” on  
page 2-16 for more information.  
22.Match the table settings to the pixel columns in the  
graph view.  
Explore the  
table  
23.Display the table of values.  
Function aplet  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To navigate around  
a table  
24.Move to X = –5.9.  
6 times  
To go directly to a  
value  
25.Move directly to X = 10.  
1 0  
To access the zoom  
options  
26.Zoom in on X = 10 by a factor of 4. Note: NUMZOOM  
has a setting of 4.  
In  
To change font size  
27. Display table numbers in large font.  
To display the  
symbolic definition  
of a column  
28.Display the symbolic definition for the F1 column.  
The symbolic definition of  
F1 is displayed at the  
bottom of the screen.  
3-8  
Function aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Function aplet interactive analysis  
From the Plot view (  
), you can use the functions on  
the FCN menu to find roots, intersections, slopes, and  
areas for a function defined in the Function aplet (and any  
Function-based aplets). See “FCN functions” on page 3-  
10. The FCN operations act on the currently selected  
graph.  
The results of the FCN functions are saved in the following  
variables:  
Area  
Extremum  
Isect  
Root  
Slope  
For example, if you use the Root function to find the root  
of a plot, you can use the result in calculations in HOME.  
Access FCN  
variables  
The FCN variables are contained on the VARS menu.  
To access FCN variables in HOME:  
Select Plot FCN  
or  
to choose a  
variable  
To access FCN variable in the Function aplet’s Symbolic  
view:  
Select Plot FCN  
or  
to choose a variable  
Function aplet  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCN functions  
The FCN functions are:  
Function  
Description  
Root  
Select Rootto find the root of the  
current function nearest the  
cursor. If no root is found, but only  
an extremum, then the result is  
labeled EXTR:instead of ROOT:.  
(The root-finder is also used in the  
Solve aplet. See also “Interpreting  
results” on page 7-6.) The cursor  
is moved to the root value on the  
x-axis and the resulting x-value is  
saved in a variable named  
ROOT.  
Extremum  
Select Extremumto find the  
maximum or minimum of the  
current function nearest the  
cursor. This displays the  
coordinate values and moves the  
cursor to the extremum. The  
resulting value is saved in a  
variable named EXTREMUM.  
Slope  
Select Slopeto find the numeric  
derivative at the current position  
of the cursor. The result is saved in  
a variable named SLOPE.  
Signed area  
Select Signed areato find the  
numeric integral. (If there are two  
or more expressions  
checkmarked, then you will be  
asked to choose the second  
expression from a list that  
includes the x-axis.) Select a  
starting point, then move the  
cursor to selection ending point.  
The result is saved in a variable  
named AREA.  
3-10  
Function aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Function  
Description (Continued)  
Intersection  
Select Intersectionto find the  
intersection of two graphs nearest  
the cursor. (You need to have at  
least two selected expressions in  
Symbolic view.) Displays the  
coordinate values and moves the  
cursor to the intersection. (Uses  
Solve function.) The resulting x-  
value is saved in a variable  
named ISECT.  
Shading area  
You can shade a selected area between functions. This  
process also gives you an approximate measurement of  
the area shaded.  
1. Open the Function aplet. The Function aplet opens in  
the Symbolic view.  
2. Select the expressions whose curves you want to  
study.  
3. Press  
4. Press  
to plot the functions.  
or  
to position the cursor at the starting  
point of the area you want to shade.  
5. Press  
.
6. Press  
.
, then select Signed areaand press  
7. Press  
, choose the function that will act as the  
boundary of the shaded area, and press  
.
8. Press the  
9. Press  
or  
key to shade in the area.  
to calculate the area. The area  
measurement is displayed near the bottom of the  
screen.  
To remove the shading, press  
to re-draw the plot.  
Function aplet  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Plotting a piecewise-defined function  
Suppose you wanted to plot the following piecewise-  
defined function.  
x + 2 ;x –1  
x2  
;–1 < x 1  
f(x) =  
4 – x ;x 1  
1. Open the Function  
aplet.  
Select  
Function  
2. Highlight the line you want to use, and enter the  
expression. (You can press  
to delete an existing  
line, or CLEAR to clear all lines.)  
2
1
CHARS ≤  
CHARS >  
1
AND  
CHARS 1  
4
CHARS > 1  
Note: You can use the  
menu key to assist in the  
entry of equations. It has the same effect as pressing  
.
3-12  
Function aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Parametric aplet  
About the Parametric aplet  
The Parametric aplet allows you to explore parametric  
equations. These are equations in which both x and y are  
defined as functions of t. They take the forms x = f(t)  
and y = g(t) .  
Getting started with the Parametric aplet  
The following example uses the parametric equations  
x(t) = 3sint  
y(t) = 3cost  
Note: This example will produce a circle. For this  
example to work, the angle measure must be set to  
degrees.  
Open the  
Parametric aplet  
1. Open the Parametric aplet.  
Select  
Parametric  
Define the  
expressions  
2. Define the expressions.  
3
3
Parametric aplet  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Set angle  
measure  
3. Set the angle measure to degrees.  
MODES  
Select Degrees  
Set up the plot  
4. Display the graphing options.  
PLOT  
The Plot Setup input form has two fields not included  
in the Function aplet, TRNGand TSTEP. TRNG  
specifies the range of t values. TSTEPspecifies the  
step value between t values.  
5. Set the TRNGand TSTEPso that t steps from 0° to  
360° in 5° steps.  
360  
5
Plot the  
expression  
6. Plot the expression.  
7. To see all the circle, press  
twice.  
4-2  
Parametric aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Overlay plot  
8. Plot a triangle graph over the existing circle graph.  
PLOT  
120  
Select OverlayPlot  
A triangle is displayed  
rather than a circle (without changing the equation)  
because the changed value of TSTEPensures that  
points being plotted are 120° apart instead of nearly  
continuous.  
You are able to explore the graph using trace, zoom,  
split screen, and scaling functionality available in the  
Function aplet. See “Exploring the graph” on page 2-  
7 for further information.  
Display the  
numbers  
9. Display the table of values.  
You can highlight a  
t-value, type in a  
replacement value,  
and see the table jump  
to that value. You can also zoom in or zoom out on  
any t-value in the table.  
You are able to explore the table using  
, build your own table, and split screen  
,
functionality available in the Function aplet. See  
“Exploring the table of numbers” on page 2-17 for  
further information.  
Parametric aplet  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Polar aplet  
Getting started with the Polar aplet  
Open the Polar  
aplet  
1. Open the Polar aplet.  
Select Polar  
Like the Function aplet,  
the Polar aplet opens  
in the Symbolic view.  
Define the  
expression  
2. Define the polar equation r = 2πcos(θ ⁄ 2)cos(θ)2 .  
2
π
2
Specify plot  
settings  
3. Specify the plot settings. In this example, we will use  
the default settings, except for the θRNGfields.  
SETUP-PLOT  
CLEAR  
4
π
Plot the  
expression  
4. Plot the expression.  
Polar aplet  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Explore the  
graph  
5. Display the Plot view menu key labels.  
The Plot view options  
available are the same  
as those found in the  
Function aplet. See  
“Exploring the graph”  
on page 2-7 for further information.  
Display the  
numbers  
6. Display the table of values for θ and R1.  
The Numeric view  
options available are  
the same as those  
found in the Function  
aplet. See “Exploring the table of numbers” on  
page 2-17 for further information.  
5-2  
Polar aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Sequence aplet  
About the Sequence aplet  
The Sequence aplet allows you to explore sequences.  
You can define a sequence named, for example, U1:  
in terms of n  
in terms of U1(n–1)  
in terms of U1(n–2)  
in terms of another sequence, for example, U2(n)  
in any combination of the above.  
The Sequence aplet allows you to create two types of  
graphs:  
A Stairsteps graph plots n on the horizontal  
axis and U on the vertical axis.  
n
A Cobweb graph plots U  
on the horizontal  
n–1  
axis and U on the vertical axis.  
n
Getting started with the Sequence aplet  
The following example defines and then plots an  
expression in the Sequence aplet. The sequence  
illustrated is the well-known Fibonacci sequence where  
each term, from the third term on, is the sum of the  
preceding two terms. In this example, we specify three  
sequence fields: the first term, the second term and a rule  
for generating all subsequent terms.  
However, you can also define a sequence by specifying  
just the first term and the rule for generating all  
subsequent terms. You will, though, have to enter the  
second term if the hp39gs is unable to calculate it  
automatically. Typically if the nth term in the sequence  
depends on n2, then you must enter the second term.  
Sequence aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-1  
   
Open the  
Sequence aplet  
1. Open the Sequence aplet.  
Select  
Sequence  
The Sequence aplet  
starts in the Symbolic  
view.  
Define the  
expression  
2. Define the Fibonacci sequence, in which each term  
(after the first two) is the sum of the preceding two  
terms:  
U1 = 1, U2 = 1, Un = Un – 1 + Un – 2 for n > 3 .  
In the Symbolic view of the Sequence aplet, highlight  
the U1(1) field and begin defining your sequence.  
1
1
Note: You can use the  
,
,
,
, and  
equations.  
menu keys to assist in the entry of  
Specify plot  
settings  
3. In Plot Setup, first set the SEQPLOToption to  
Stairstep. Reset the default plot settings by  
clearing the Plot Setup view.  
SETUP-PLOT  
CLEAR  
8
8
6-2  
Sequence aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Plot the  
sequence  
4. Plot the Fibonacci  
sequence.  
5. In Plot Setup, set the SEQPLOT option to Cobweb.  
SETUP-PLOT  
Select Cobweb  
Display the table 6. Display the table of values for this example.  
Sequence aplet  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Solve aplet  
About the Solve aplet  
The Solve aplet solves an equation or an expression for  
its unknown variable. You define an equation or  
expression in the symbolic view, then supply values for all  
the variables except one in the numeric view. Solve works  
only with real numbers.  
Note the differences between an equation and an  
expression:  
An equation contains an equals sign. Its solution is a  
value for the unknown variable that makes both sides  
have the same value.  
An expression does not contain an equals sign. Its  
solution is a root, a value for the unknown variable  
that makes the expression have a value of zero.  
You can use the Solve aplet to solve an equation for any  
one of its variables.  
When the Solve aplet is started, it opens in the Solve  
Symbolic view.  
In Symbolic view, you specify the expression or  
equation to solve. You can define up to ten equations  
(or expressions), named E0 to E9. Each equation can  
contain up to 27 real variables, named A to Z and θ.  
In Numeric view, you specify the values of the known  
variables, highlight the variable that you want to  
solve for, and press  
.
You can solve the equation as many times as you want,  
using new values for the knowns and highlighting a  
different unknown.  
Note: It is not possible to solve for more than one variable  
at once. Simultaneous linear equations, for example,  
should be solved using the Linear Solver aplet, matrices  
or graphs in the Function aplet.  
Solve aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-1  
   
Getting started with the Solve aplet  
Suppose you want to find the acceleration needed to  
increase the speed of a car from 16.67 m/sec (60 kph)  
to 27.78 m/sec (100 kph) in a distance of 100 m.  
The equation to solve is:  
V2 = U2 + 2AD  
Open the Solve  
aplet  
1. Open the Solve aplet.  
Select Solve  
The Solve aplet starts in  
the symbolic view.  
Define the  
equation  
2. Define the equation.  
V
U
2
A
D
Note: You can use the  
entry of equations.  
menu key to assist in the  
Enter known  
variables  
3. Display the Solve numeric view screen.  
7-2  
Solve aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Enter the values for the known variables.  
2 7  
1 6  
7 8  
6 7  
1 0 0  
H I N T  
If the Decimal Mark setting in the Modes input form  
MODES) is set to Comma, use instead of  
(
.
Solve the  
unknown  
variable  
5. Solve for the unknown variable (A).  
Therefore, the acceleration needed to increase the  
speed of a car from 16.67 m/sec (60 kph) to 27.78  
m/sec  
(100 kph) in a distance of 100 m is approximately  
2
2.47 m/s .  
Because the variable A in the equation is linear we  
know that we need not look for any other solutions.  
Plot the  
equation  
The Plot view shows one graph for each side of the  
selected equation. You can choose any of the  
variables to be the independent variable.  
The current equation is V2 = U2 + 2AD .  
One of these is Y = V2 , with V = 27.78 , that is,  
Y = 771.7284 . This graph will be a horizontal line.  
The other graph will be Y = U2 + 2AD , with  
U = 16.67 and D = 100, that is,  
Y = 200A + 277.8889 . This graph is also a line. The  
desired solution is the value of A where these two  
lines intersect.  
Solve aplet  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Plot the equation for variable A.  
Select Auto  
Scale  
7. Trace along the graph  
representing the left  
side of the equation  
until the cursor nears  
the intersection.  
20 times  
Note the value of A displayed near the bottom left  
corner of the screen.  
The Plot view provides a convenient way to find an  
approximation to a solution instead of using the  
Numeric view Solve option. See “Plotting to find  
guesses” on page 7-7 for more information.  
Solve aplet’s NUM view keys  
The Solve aplet’s NUM view keys are:  
Key  
Meaning  
Copies the highlighted value to the  
edit line for editing. Press  
done.  
when  
Displays a message about the  
solution (see “Interpreting results” on  
page 7-6).  
Displays other pages of variables, if  
any.  
Displays the symbolic definition of the  
current expression. Press  
done.  
when  
Finds a solution for the highlighted  
variable, based on the values of the  
other variables.  
7-4  
Solve aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Key  
Meaning (Continued)  
Clears highlighted variable to zero or  
deletes current character in edit line,  
if edit line is active.  
CLEAR  
Resets all variable values to zero or  
clears the edit line, if cursor is in edit  
line.  
Use an initial guess  
You can usually obtain a faster and more accurate  
solution if you supply an estimated value for the unknown  
variable before pressing  
a solution at the initial guess.  
. Solve starts looking for  
Before plotting, make sure the unknown variable is  
highlighted in the numeric view. Plot the equation to help  
you select an initial guess when you don’t know the range  
in which to look for the solution. See “Plotting to find  
guesses” on page 7-7 for further information.  
H I N T  
An initial guess is especially important in the case of a  
curve that could have more than one solution. In this case,  
only the solution closest to the initial guess is returned.  
Number format  
You can change the number format for the Solve aplet in  
the Numeric Setup view. The options are the same as in  
HOME MODES: Standard, Fixed, Scientific, and  
Engineering. For the latter three, you also specify how  
many digits of accuracy you want. See “Mode settings”  
on page 1-10 for more information.  
You might find it handy to set a different number format  
for the Solve aplet if, for example, you define equations  
to solve for the value of money. A number format of  
Fixed2would be appropriate in this case.  
Solve aplet  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Interpreting results  
After Solve has returned a solution, press  
in the  
Numeric view for more information. You will see one of  
the following three messages. Press  
message.  
to clear the  
Message  
Condition  
Zero  
The Solve aplet found a point where  
both sides of the equation were  
equal, or where the expression was  
zero (a root), within the calculator's  
12-digit accuracy.  
Sign Reversal  
Solve found two points where the  
difference between the two sides of  
the equation has opposite signs, but  
it cannot find a point in between  
where the value is zero. Similarly,  
for an expression, where the value  
of the expression has different signs  
but is not precisely zero. This might  
be because either the two points are  
neighbours (they differ by one in the  
twelfth digit), or the equation is not  
real-valued between the two points.  
Solve returns the point where the  
value or difference is closer to zero.  
If the equation or expression is  
continuously real, this point is  
Solve’s best approximation of an  
actual solution.  
Extremum  
Solve found a point where the value  
of the expression approximates a  
local minimum (for positive values)  
or maximum (for negative values).  
This point may or may not be a  
solution.  
Or: Solve stopped searching at  
9.99999999999E499, the largest  
number the calculator can  
represent.  
Note that the value returned is  
probably not valid.  
7-6  
Solve aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
If Solve could not find a solution, you will see one of the  
following two messages.  
Message  
Condition  
Bad Guess(es)  
The initial guess lies outside the  
domain of the equation.  
Therefore, the solution was not a  
real number or it caused an error.  
Constant?  
The value of the equation is the  
same at every point sampled.  
H I N T  
It is important to check the information relating to the  
solve process. For example, the solution that the Solve  
aplet finds is not a solution, but the closest that the  
function gets to zero. Only by checking the information  
will you know that this is the case.  
The Root-Finder  
at work  
You can watch the process of the root-finder calculating  
and searching for a root. Immediately after pressing  
to start the root-finder, press any key except  
You will see two intermediate guesses and, to the left, the  
sign of the expression evaluated at each guess. For  
example:  
.
+ 2 2.219330555745  
– 1 21.31111111149  
You can watch as the root-finder either finds a sign  
reversal or converges on a local extrema or does not  
converge at all. If there is no convergence in process, you  
might want to cancel the operation (press  
over with a different initial guess.  
) and start  
Plotting to find guesses  
The main reason for plotting in the Solve aplet is to help  
you find initial guesses and solutions for those equations  
that have difficult-to-find or multiple solutions.  
Consider the equation of motion for an accelerating  
body:  
AT 2  
X =V0T +  
2
Solve aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-7  
                 
where X is distance, V is initial velocity, T is time, and A  
0
is acceleration. This is actually two equations, Y = X and  
2
Y = V T + (AT ) / 2.  
0
Since this equation is quadratic for T, there can be both  
a positive and a negative solution. However, we are  
concerned only with positive solutions, since only positive  
distance makes sense.  
1. Select the Solve aplet and enter the equation.  
Select Solve  
X
V
T
A
T
2
2. Find the solution for T (time) when X=30, V=2, and  
A=4. Enter the values for X, V, and A; then highlight  
the independent variable, T.  
30  
2
4
to highlight T  
3. Use the Plot view to find an initial guess for T. First set  
appropriate X and Y ranges in the Plot Setup. With  
2
equation X = V x T + A x T /2, the plot will produce  
two graphs: one for Y = X and one for  
2
X = V x T + A x T /2. Since we have set X = 30 in  
this example, one of the graphs will be Y = 30 .  
Therefore, make the YRNG5 to 35. Keep the XRNG  
default of 6.5 to 6.5.  
SETUP-PLOT  
5
35  
4. Plot the graph.  
7-8  
Solve aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Move the cursor near the positive (right-side)  
intersection. This cursor value will be an initial guess  
for T.  
Press  
until the  
cursor is at the  
intersection.  
The two points of  
intersection show that  
there are two solutions for this equation. However,  
only positive values for X make sense, so we want to  
find the solution for the intersection on the right side  
of the y-axis.  
6. Return to the Numeric  
view.  
Note: the T-value is filled in with the position of the  
cursor from the Plot view.  
7. Ensure that the T value is highlighted, and solve the  
equation.  
Use this equation to solve for another variable, such as  
velocity. How fast must a body’s initial velocity be in  
order for it to travel 50 m within 3 seconds? Assume the  
2
same acceleration, 4 m/s . Leave the last value of V as  
the initial guess.  
3
50  
Solve aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-9  
Using variables in equations  
You can use any of the real variable names, A to Z and  
θ. Do not use variable names defined for other types,  
such as M1 (a matrix variable).  
Home variables  
All home variables (other than those for aplet settings, like  
Xminand Ytick) are global, which means they are  
shared throughout the different aplets of the calculator. A  
value that is assigned to a home variable anywhere  
remains with that variable wherever its name is used.  
Therefore, if you have defined a value for T (as in the  
above example) in another aplet or even another Solve  
equation, that value shows up in the Numeric view for this  
Solve equation. When you then redefine the value for T  
in this Solve equation, that value is applied to T in all  
other contexts (until it is changed again).  
This sharing allows you to work on the same problem in  
different places (such as HOME and the Solve aplet)  
without having to update the value whenever it is  
recalculated.  
H I N T  
As the Solve aplet uses existing variable values, be sure  
to check for existing variable values that may affect the  
solve process. (You can use  
CLEAR to reset all  
values to zero in the Solve aplet’s Numeric view if you  
wish.)  
Aplet variables  
Functions defined in other aplets can also be referenced  
in the Solve aplet. For example, if, in the Function aplet,  
2
you define F1(X)=X +10, you can enter F1(X)=50in  
2
the Solve aplet to solve the equation X +10=50.  
7-10  
Solve aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8
Linear Solver aplet  
About the Linear Solver aplet  
The Linear Solver aplet allows you to solve a set of Linear  
Equations. The set can contain two or three linear  
equations.  
In a two-equation set, each equation must be in the form  
ax + by = k . In a three-equation set, each equation must  
be in the form ax + by + cz = k .  
You provide values for a, b, and k (and c in three-  
equation sets) for each equation, and the Linear Solver  
aplet will attempt to solve for x and y (and z in three-  
equation sets).  
The hp39gs will alert you if no solution can be found, or  
if there is an infinite number of solutions.  
Note that the Linear Solver aplet only has a numeric view.  
Getting started with the Linear Solver aplet  
The following example defines a set of three equations  
and then solves for the unknown variables.  
Open the  
Linear Solver  
aplet  
1. Open the Linear Sequence aplet.  
Select Linear  
Solver  
The Linear Equation  
Solver opens.  
Linear Solver aplet  
8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Choose the  
equation set  
2. If the last time you used  
the Linear Solver aplet  
you solved for two  
equations, the two-  
equation input form is  
displayed (as in the  
example in the  
previous step). To solve a three-equation set, press  
. Now the input form displays three equations.  
If the three-equation input form is displayed and you want  
to solve a two-equation set, press  
.
In this example, we are going to solve the following  
equation set:  
6x + 9y + 6z = 5  
7x + 10y + 8z = 10  
6x + 4y = 6  
Hence we need the three-equation input form.  
Define and  
solve the  
equations  
3. You define the equations you want to solve by  
entering the co-efficients of each variable in each  
equation and the constant term. Notice that the cursor  
is immediately positioned at the co-efficient of x in the  
first equation. Enter that co-efficient and press  
or  
.
4. The cursor moves to the next co-efficient. Enter that co-  
efficient, press  
or  
, and continue doing  
likewise until you have defined all the equations.  
Note: you can enter the name of a variable for any  
co-efficient or constant. Press  
entering the name. The  
and begin  
menu key appears.  
Press that key to lock alphabetic entry mode. Press it  
again to cancel the lock.  
Once you have entered  
enough values for the  
solver to be able to  
generate solutions,  
those solutions appear  
on the display. In the  
example at the right,  
the solver was able to find solutions for x, y, and z as  
8-2  
Linear Solver aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
soon as the first co-efficient of the last equation was  
entered.  
As you enter each of  
the remaining known  
values, the solution  
changes. The example  
at the right shows the  
final solution once all  
the co-efficients and  
constants are entered for the set of equations we set  
out to solve.  
Linear Solver aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
Triangle Solve aplet  
About the Triangle Solver aplet  
The Triangle Solver aplet allows you to determine the  
length of a side of a triangle, or the angle at the vertex of  
a triangle, from information you supply about the other  
lengths and/or other angles.  
You need to specify at least three of the six possible  
values—the lengths of the three sides and the size of the  
three angles—before the solver can calculate the other  
values. Moreover, at least one value you specify must be  
a length. For example, you could specify the lengths of  
two sides and one of the angles; or you could specify two  
angles and one length; or all three lengths. In each case,  
the solver will calculate the remaining lengths or angles.  
The hp39gs will alert you if no solution can be found, or  
if you have provided insufficient data.  
If you are determining the properties of a right-angled  
triangle, a simpler input form is available by pressing the  
menu key.  
Note that the Triangle Solver aplet only has a numeric  
view.  
Getting started with the Triangle Solver aplet  
The following example solves for the unknown length of  
the side of a triangle whose two known sides—of lengths  
4 and 6—meet at an angle of 30 degrees.  
Before you begin: You should make sure that your angle  
measure mode is appropriate. If the angle information  
you have is in degrees (as in this example) and your  
current angle measure mode is radians or grads, change  
the mode to degrees before running the solver. (See  
“Mode settings” on page 1-10 for instructions.) Because  
the angle measure mode is associated with the aplet, you  
should start the aplet first and then change the setting.  
Triangle Solve aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-1  
 
Open the  
Triangle  
Solver aplet  
1. Open the Triangle Solver aplet.  
Select  
Triangle Solver  
The Triangle Solver  
aplet opens.  
Note: if you have already used the Triangle Solver,  
the entries and results from the previous use will still  
be displayed. To start the Triangle Solver afresh, clear  
the previous entries and results by pressing  
CLEAR.  
Choose the  
triangle type  
2. If the last time you used  
the Triangle Solver  
aplet you used the  
right-angled triangle  
input form, that input  
form is displayed  
again (as in the  
example at the right). If the triangle you are  
investigating is not a right-angled triangle, or you are  
not sure what type it is, you should use the general  
input form (illustrated in the previous step). To switch  
to the general input form, press  
.
If the general input form is displayed and you are  
investigating a right-angled triangle, press  
display the simpler input form.  
to  
Specify the  
known values  
3. Using the arrow keys, move to a field whose value  
you know, enter the value and press  
Repeat for each known value.  
or  
.
Note that the lengths of  
the sides are labeled  
A, B, and C, and the  
angles are labeled α,  
β, and δ. It is important  
that you enter the  
known values in the  
appropriate fields. In our example, we know the  
length of two sides and the angle at which those  
sides meet. Hence if we specify the lengths of sides A  
and B, we must enter the angle as δ (since δ is the  
angle where A and B meet). If instead we entered the  
9-2  
Triangle Solve aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
lengths as B and C, we would need to specify the  
angle as α. The illustration on the display will help  
you determine where to enter the known values.  
Note: if you need to change the angle measure  
mode, press  
MODES, change the mode, and  
then press  
to return to the aplet.  
4. Press  
. The solver  
calculates the values of  
the unknown variables  
and displays. As the  
illustration at the right  
shows, the length of  
the unknown side in our example is 3.2296. (The  
other two angles have also been calculated.)  
Note: if two sides and  
an adjacent acute  
angle are entered and  
there are two solutions,  
only one will be  
displayed initially.  
In this case, an  
menu key is displayed  
(as in this example).  
You press  
to  
display the second  
solution, and  
again to return to the  
first solution.  
Errors  
No solution with  
given data  
If you are using the general  
input form and you enter  
more than 3 values, the  
values might not be  
consistent, that is, no  
triangle could possibly have all the values you specified.  
In these cases, No sol with given dataappears on  
the screen.  
The situation is similar if you are using the simpler input  
form (for a right-angled triangle) and you enter more than  
two values.  
Triangle Solve aplet  
9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Not enough data  
If you are using the general  
input form, you need to  
specify at least three values  
for the Triangle Solver to  
be able to calculate the  
remaining attributes of the  
triangle. If you specify less than three, Not enough  
dataappears on the screen.  
If you are using the simplified input form (for a right-  
angled triangle), you must specify at least two values.  
In addition, you cannot specify only angles and no  
lengths.  
9-4  
Triangle Solve aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
Statistics aplet  
About the Statistics aplet  
The Statistics aplet can store up to ten data sets at one  
time. It can perform one-variable or two-variable  
statistical analysis of one or more sets of data.  
The Statistics aplet starts with the Numeric view which is  
used to enter data. The Symbolic view is used to specify  
which columns contain data and which column contains  
frequencies.  
You can also compute statistics values in HOME and  
recall the values of specific statistics variables.  
The values computed in the Statistics aplet are saved in  
variables, and many of these variables are listed by the  
function accessible from the Statistics aplet’s  
Numeric view screen.  
Getting started with the Statistics aplet  
The following example asks you to enter and analyze the  
advertising and sales data (in the table below), compute  
statistics, fit a curve to the data, and predict the effect of  
more advertising on sales.  
Advertising minutes  
(independent, x)  
Resulting Sales ($)  
(dependent, y)  
2
1
3
5
5
4
1400  
920  
1100  
2265  
2890  
2200  
Statistics aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-1  
   
Open the  
Statistics aplet  
1. Open the Statistics aplet and clear existing data by  
pressing  
.
Select Statistics  
The Statistics aplet  
starts in the Numerical  
view.  
1VAR/2VAR  
menu key label  
At any time the Statistics aplet is configured for only  
one of two types of statistical explorations: one-  
variable (  
) or two-variable (  
). The 5th  
menu key label in the Numeric view toggles between  
these two options and shows the current option.  
2. Select  
.
You need to select  
because in this example  
we are analyzing a dataset comprising two  
variables: advertising minutes and resulting sales.  
Enter data  
3. Enter the data into the columns.  
2
3
5
1
5
4
to move to the next  
column  
1400  
1100  
2890  
920  
2265  
2200  
10-2  
Statistics aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Choose fit and  
data columns  
4. Select a fit in the Symbolic setup view.  
SETUP-SYMB  
Select Linear  
You can create up to five explorations of two-variable  
data, named S1to S5. In this example, we will create  
just one: S1.  
5. Specify the columns that hold the data you want to  
analyze.  
You could have entered  
your data into columns  
other than C1and C2.  
Explore statistics 6. Find the mean advertising time (MEANX) and the  
mean sales (MEANY).  
MEANXis 3.3 minutes  
and MEANYis about  
$1796.  
7. Scroll down to display the value for the correlation  
coefficient (CORR). The CORRvalue indicates how  
well the linear model fits the data.  
9 times  
The value is .8995.  
Statistics aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-3  
Setup plot  
8. Change the plotting range to ensure all the data  
points are plotted (and select a different point mark, if  
you wish).  
SETUP-PLOT  
7
100  
4000  
Plot the graph  
9. Plot the graph.  
Draw the  
regression curve  
10.Draw the regression curve (a curve to fit the data  
points).  
This draws the  
regression line for the  
best linear fit.  
Display the  
equation for  
best linear fit  
11.Return to the Symbolic view.  
12.Display the equation for the best linear fit.  
to move to the  
FIT1field  
The full FIT1  
expression is shown.  
The slope (m) is 425.875. The y-intercept (b) is  
376.25.  
10-4  
Statistics aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Predict values  
13.To find the predicted sales figure if advertising were  
to go up to 6 minutes:  
S (to highlight  
Stat-Two)  
(to highlight  
PREDY)  
6
14.Return to the Plot view.  
15.Jump to the indicated point on the regression line.  
6
Observe the predicted  
y-value in the left  
bottom corner of the  
screen.  
Statistics aplet  
10-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entering and editing statistical data  
The Numeric view (  
) is used to enter data into the  
Statistics aplet. Each column represents a variable named  
C0to C9. After entering the data, you must define the  
data set in the Symbolic view (  
).  
H I N T  
A data column must have at least four data points to  
provide valid two-variable statistics, or two data points  
for one-variable statistics.  
You can also store statistical data values by copying lists  
from HOME into Statistics data columns. For example, in  
HOME, L1  
C1stores a copy of the list L1into the  
data-column variable C1.  
Statistics aplet’s NUM view keys  
The Statistics aplet’s Numeric view keys are:  
Key  
Meaning  
Copies the highlighted item into the  
edit line.  
Inserts a zero value above the  
highlighted cell.  
Sorts the specified independent  
data column in ascending or  
descending order, and rearranges  
a specified dependent (or  
frequency) data column  
accordingly.  
Switches between larger and  
smaller font sizes.  
A toggle switch to select one-  
variable or two-variable statistics.  
This setting affects the statistical  
calculations and plots. The label  
indicates which setting is current.  
Computes descriptive statistics for  
each data set specified in Symbolic  
view.  
10-6  
Statistics aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Key  
Meaning (Continued)  
Deletes the currently highlighted  
value.  
CLEAR  
Clears the current column or all  
columns of data. Pregss  
CLEAR to display a menu list,  
then select the current column or all  
columns option, and press  
.
Moves to the first or last row, or first  
cursor key or last column.  
Example  
You are measuring the height of students in a classroom  
to find the mean height. The first five students have the  
following measurements 160cm, 165cm, 170cm,  
175cm, 180cm.  
1. Open the Statistics aplet.  
Select  
Statistics  
2. Enter the measurement  
data.  
160  
165  
170  
175  
180  
3. Find the mean of the  
sample.  
Ensure the  
/
menu key label  
. Press  
reads  
to see the  
statistics calculated from the sample data in C1.  
Statistics aplet  
10-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note that the title of the  
column of statistics is  
H1. There are 5 data  
set definitions available  
for one-variable  
statistics: H1–H5. If  
data is entered in C1, H1is automatically set to use  
C1for data, and the frequency of each data point is  
set to 1. You can select other columns of data from  
the Statistics Symbolic setup view.  
4. Press  
to close the  
statistics window and  
press  
key to see  
the data set definitions.  
The first column  
indicates the associated column of data for each data  
set definition, and the second column indicates the  
constant frequency, or the column that holds the  
frequencies.  
The keys you can use from this window are:  
Key  
Meaning  
Copies the column variable (or  
variable expression) to the edit line  
for editing. Press  
when done.  
Checks/unchecks the current data  
set. Only the checkmarked data  
set(s) are computed and plotted.  
or  
Typing aid for the column variables  
(
) or for the Fit expressions ( ).  
Displays the current variable  
expression in standard  
mathematical form. Press  
done.  
when  
Evaluates the variables in the  
highlighted column (C1, etc.)  
expression.  
10-8  
Statistics aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Key  
Meaning (Continued)  
Displays the menu for entering  
variable names or contents of  
variables.  
Displays the menu for entering math  
operations.  
Deletes the highlighted variable or  
the current character in the edit line.  
CLEAR  
Resets default specifications for the  
data sets or clears the edit line (if it  
was active).  
Note: If  
CLEAR is used the  
data sets will need to be selected  
again before re-use.  
To continue our example, suppose that the heights of the  
rest of the students in the class are measured, but each  
one is rounded to the nearest of the five values first  
recorded. Instead of entering all the new data in C1, we  
shall simply add another column, C2, that holds the  
frequencies of our five data points in C1.  
Height  
(cm)  
Frequency  
160  
165  
170  
175  
180  
5
3
8
2
1
5. Move the highlight bar  
into the right column of  
the H1definition and  
replace the frequency  
value of 1 with the  
name C2.  
2
Statistics aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-9  
6. Return to the numeric view.  
7. Enter the frequency data shown in the above table.  
5
3
8
2
1
8. Display the computed  
statistics.  
The mean height is  
approximately  
167.63cm.  
9. Setup a histogram plot for the data.  
SETUP-PLOT  
Enter set up information  
appropriate to your  
data.  
10.Plot a histogram of the  
data.  
Save data  
The data that you enter is automatically saved. When you  
are finished entering data values, you can press a key for  
another Statistics view (like  
another aplet or HOME.  
), or you can switch to  
Edit a data set  
In the Numeric view of the Statistics aplet, highlight the  
data value to change. Type a new value and  
press  
, or press  
to copy the value to the edit  
after modifying the  
line for modification. Press  
value on the edit line.  
10-10  
Statistics aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Delete data  
Insert data  
To delete a single data item, highlight it and press  
. The values below the deleted cell will scroll up  
one row.  
To delete a column of data, highlight an entry in that  
column and press  
name.  
CLEAR. Select the column  
To delete all columns of data, press  
CLEAR.  
Select All columns.  
Highlight the entry following the point of insertion. Press  
, then enter a number. It will write over the zero that  
was inserted.  
Sort data  
values  
1. In Numeric view, highlight the column you want to  
sort, and press  
.
2. Specify the Sort Order. You can choose either  
Ascendingor Descending.  
3. Specify the INDEPENDENTand DEPENDENTdata  
columns. Sorting is by the independent column. For  
instance, if Age is C1and Income is C2and you  
want to sort by Income, then you make C2the  
independent column for the sorting and C1the  
dependent column.  
To sort just one column, choose None for the  
dependent column.  
For one-variable statistics with two data columns,  
specify the frequency column as the dependent  
column.  
4. Press  
.
Statistics aplet  
10-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Defining a regression model  
The Symbolic view includes an expression (Fit1 through  
Fit5) that defines the regression model, or “fit”, to use for  
the regression analysis of each two-variable data set.  
There are three ways to select a regression model:  
Accept the default option to fit the data to a straight  
line.  
Select one of the available fit options in Symbolic  
Setup view.  
Enter your own mathematical expression in Symbolic  
view. This expression will be plotted, but it will not be  
fitted to the data points.  
Angle Setting  
You can ignore the angle measurement mode unless your  
Fit definition (in Symbolic view) involves a trigonometric  
function. In this case, you should specify in the mode  
screen whether the trigonometric units are to be  
interpreted in degrees, radians, or grads.  
To choose the fit 1. In Numeric view, make sure  
is set.  
2. Press  
SETUP-SYMB to display the Symbolic Setup  
view. Highlight the Fit number (S1FITto S5FIT) you  
want to define.  
3. Press  
and select from the list. Press  
when  
done. The regression formula for the fit is displayed in  
Symbolic view.  
Fit models  
Ten fit models are available:  
Fit model  
Meaning  
Linear  
(Default.) Fits the data to a  
straight line, y = mx+b. Uses a  
least-squares fit.  
Logarithmic  
Exponential  
Power  
Fits to a logarithmic curve,  
y = m lnx + b.  
Fits to an exponential curve,  
mx  
y = be .  
m
Fits to a power curve, y = bx .  
10-12  
Statistics aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Fit model  
Meaning (Continued)  
Quadratic  
Fits to a quadratic curve,  
2
y = ax +bx+c. Needs at least  
three points.  
Cubic  
Fits to a cubic curve,  
3
2
y = ax +bx +cx+d. Needs at least  
four points.  
Logistic  
Fits to a logistic curve,  
L
--------------------------  
y =  
,
1 + ae(bx)  
where L is the saturation value for  
growth. You can store a positive  
real value in L, or—if L=0—let L  
be computed automatically.  
Exponent  
Fits to an exponent curve,  
y = abx .  
Trigonometric  
Fits to a trigonometric curve,  
y = a sin(bx + c) + d . Needs at  
least three points.  
User Defined  
Define your own expression (in  
Symbolic view.)  
To define your  
own fit  
1. In Numeric view, make sure  
2. Display the Symbolic view.  
is set.  
3. Highlight the Fit expression (Fit1, etc.) for the  
desired data set.  
4. Type in an expression and press  
.
The independent variable must be X, and the  
expression must not contain any unknown variables.  
Example:1.5 × cosx + 0.3 × sinx .  
This automatically changes the Fit type (S1FIT, etc.) in  
the Symbolic Setup view to User Defined.  
Statistics aplet  
10-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Computed statistics  
One-variable  
Statistic  
Definition  
NΣ  
Number of data points.  
TOTΣ  
Sum of data values (with their  
frequencies).  
MEANΣ  
PVARΣ  
SVARΣ  
PSDEV  
Mean value of data set.  
Population variance of data set.  
Sample variance of data set.  
Population standard deviation of  
data set.  
SSDEV  
Sample standard deviation of data  
set.  
MINΣ  
Minimum data value in data set.  
Q1  
First quartile: median of values to  
left of median.  
MEDIAN  
Q3  
Median value of data set.  
Third quartile: median of values to  
right of median.  
MAXΣ  
Maximum data value in data set.  
When the data set contains an odd number of values, the  
data set’s median value is not used when calculating Q1  
and Q3 in the table above. For example, for the following  
data set:  
{3,5,7,8,15,16,17}  
only the first three items, 3, 5, and 7 are used to calculate  
Q1, and only the last three terms, 15, 16, and 17 are  
used to calculate Q3.  
10-14  
Statistics aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Two-variable  
Statistic  
MEANX  
ΣX  
Definition  
Mean of x- (independent) values.  
Sum of x-values.  
2
ΣX2  
Sum of x -values.  
MEANY  
ΣY  
Mean of y- (dependent) values.  
Sum of y-values.  
2
ΣY2  
Sum of y -values.  
ΣXY  
Sum of each xy.  
SCOV  
Sample covariance of independent  
and dependent data columns.  
PCOV  
CORR  
Population covariance of  
independent and dependent data  
columns  
Correlation coefficient of the  
independent and dependent data  
columns for a linear fit only  
(regardless of the Fit chosen).  
Returns a value from 0 to 1, where  
1 is the best fit.  
RELERR  
The relative error for the selected  
fit. Provides a measure of accuracy  
for the fit.  
Plotting  
You can plot:  
histograms (  
)
box-and-whisker plots (  
scatter plots ( ).  
)
Once you have entered your data (  
data set ( ), and defined your Fit model for two-  
variable statistics ( SETUP-SYMB), you can plot your  
), defined your  
data. You can plot up to five scatter or box-and-whisker  
plots at a time. You can plot only one histogram at a time.  
Statistics aplet  
10-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
To plot statistical  
data  
1. In Symbolic view (  
sets you want to plot.  
), select (  
) the data  
2. For one-variable data (  
), select the plot type in  
Plot Setup (  
SETUP-PLOT). Highlight STATPLOT,  
press  
, select either Histogramor  
BoxWhisker, and press  
.
3. For any plot, but especially for a histogram, adjust the  
plotting scale and range in the Plot Setup view. If you  
find histogram bars too fat or too thin, you can adjust  
them by adjusting the HWIDTHsetting.  
4. Press  
. If you have not adjusted the Plot Setup  
select Auto Scale  
yourself, you can try  
.
Auto Scale can be relied upon to give a good starting  
scale which can then be adjusted in the Plot Setup view.  
Plot types  
Histogram  
One-variable statistics.  
The numbers below the plot  
mean that the current bar  
(where the cursor is) starts at  
0 and ends at 2 (not  
including 2), and the  
frequency for this column, (that is, the number of data  
elements that fall between 0 and 2) is 1. You can see  
information about the next bar by pressing the  
key.  
Box and  
Whisker Plot  
One-variable statistics.  
The left whisker marks the  
minimum data value. The  
box marks the first quartile,  
the median (where the cursor  
is), and the third quartile.  
The right whisker marks the maximum data value. The  
numbers below the plot mean that this column has a  
median of 13.  
10-16  
Statistics aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Scatter Plot  
Two-variable statistics.  
The numbers below the plot  
indicate that the cursor is at  
the first data point for S2, at  
(1, 6). Press  
to move to  
the next data point and  
display information about it.  
they are plotted, checkmark  
CONNECTin the second  
page of the Plot Setup. This is  
not a regression curve.  
Fitting a curve to 2VAR data  
In the Plot view, press  
. This draws a curve to fit the  
checked two-variable data set(s). See “To choose the fit”  
on page 10-12.  
The expression in Fit2  
shows that the  
slope=1.98082191781  
and the y-  
intercept=2.2657.  
Correlation  
coefficient  
The correlation coefficient is stored in the CORRvariable.  
It is a measure of fit to a linear curve only. Regardless of  
the Fit model you have chosen, CORR relates to the linear  
model.  
Statistics aplet  
10-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Relative Error  
The relative error is a measure of the error between  
predicted values and actual values based on the specified  
Fit. A smaller number means a better fit.  
The relative error is stored in a variable named RELERR.  
The relative error provides a measure of fit accuracy for  
all fits, and it does depend on the Fit model you have  
chosen.  
H I N T  
In order to access the CORRand RELERRvariables after  
you plot a set of statistics, you must press  
to display the  
the numeric view and then  
correlation values. The values are stored in the variables  
when you access the Symbolic view.  
Setting up the plot (Plot setup view)  
The Plot Setup view (  
SETUP-PLOT) sets most of the  
same plotting parameters as it does for the other built-in  
aplets.  
See “About the Plot view” on page 2-5. Settings unique  
to the Statistics aplet are as follows:  
Plot type (1VAR)  
Histogram width  
Histogram range  
STATPLOTenables you to specify either a histogram or  
a box-and-whisker plot for one-variable statistics (when  
is set). Press  
to change the highlighted  
setting  
HWIDTHenables you to specify the width of a histogram  
bar. This determines how many bars will fit in the display,  
as well as how the data is distributed (how many values  
each bar represents).  
HRNGenables you to specify the range of values for a set  
of histogram bars. The range runs from the left edge of the  
leftmost bar to the right edge of the rightmost bar. You  
can limit the range to exclude any values you suspect are  
outliers.  
Plotting mark  
(2VAR)  
S1MARKthrough S5MARKenables you to specify one of  
five symbols to use to plot each data set. Press  
change the highlighted setting.  
to  
Connected points  
(2VAR)  
CONNECT(on the second page), when checkmarked,  
connects the data points as they are plotted. The resulting  
line is not the regression curve. The order of plotting is  
according to the ascending order of independent values.  
10-18  
Statistics aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
For instance, the data set (1,1), (3,9), (4,16), (2,4) would  
be plotted and traced in the order (1,1), (2,4), (3,9),  
(4,16).  
Trouble-shooting a plot  
If you have problems plotting, check that you have the  
following:  
The correct  
view).  
or  
menu label on (Numeric  
The correct fit (regression model), if the data set is  
two-variable.  
Only the data sets to compute or plot are  
checkmarked (Symbolic view).  
The correct plotting range. Try using  
Auto  
Scale (instead of ), or adjust the plotting  
parameters (in Plot Setup) for the ranges of the axes  
and the width of histogram bars (HWIDTH).  
In  
mode, ensure that both paired columns contain  
In  
mode, ensure that a paired column of frequency  
values is the same length as the data column that it refers  
to.  
Exploring the graph  
The Plot view has menu keys for zooming, tracing, and  
coordinate display. There are also scaling options under  
. These options are described in“Exploring the  
graph” on page 2-7.  
Statistics aplet’s PLOT view keys  
Key  
Meaning  
CLEAR  
Erases the plot.  
Offers additional pre-defined views  
for splitting the screen, overlaying  
plots, and autoscaling the axes.  
Moves cursor to far left or far right.  
Statistics aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-19  
     
Key  
Meaning (Continued)  
Displays ZOOM menu.  
Turns trace mode on/off. The white  
box appears next to the option when  
Trace mode is active.  
Turns fit mode on or off. Turning  
on draws a curve to fit the data points  
according to the current regression  
model.  
(2var  
Enables you to specify a value on the  
statistics only) line of best fit to jump to or a data  
point number to jump to.  
Displays the equation of the  
regression curve.  
Hides and displays the menu key  
labels. When the labels are hidden,  
any menu key displays the (x,y)  
coordinates. Pressing  
redisplays the menu labels.  
Calculating predicted values  
The functions PREDXand PREDYestimate (predict) values  
for X or Y given a hypothetical value for the other. The  
estimation is made based on the curve that has been  
calculated to fit the data according to the specified fit.  
Find predicted  
values  
1. In Plot view, draw the regression curve for the data  
set.  
2. Press  
3. Press  
to move to the regression curve.  
and enter the value of X. The cursor  
jumps to the specified point on the curve and the  
coordinate display shows X and the predicted value  
of Y.  
In HOME:  
Enter PREDX(y-value)  
to find the predicted  
value for the independent variable given a  
hypothetical dependent value.  
10-20  
Statistics aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Enter PREDY(x-value) to find the predicted value of the  
dependent variable given a hypothetical independent  
variable.  
You can type PREDXand PREDYinto the edit line, or you  
can copy these function names from the MATH menu  
under the Stat-Two category.  
H I N T  
In cases where more than one fit curve is displayed, the  
PREDY function uses the most recently calculated curve. In  
order to avoid errors with this function, uncheck all fits  
except the one that you want to work with, or use the Plot  
View method.  
Statistics aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
Inference aplet  
About the Inference aplet  
The Inference capabilities include calculation of  
confidence intervals and hypothesis tests based on the  
Normal Z-distribution or Student’s t-distribution.  
Based on the statistics from one or two samples, you can  
test hypotheses and find confidence intervals for the  
following quantities:  
mean  
proportion  
difference between two means  
difference between two proportions  
Example data  
When you first access an input form for an Inference test,  
by default, the input form contains example data. This  
example data is designed to return meaningful results that  
relate to the test. It is useful for gaining an understanding  
of what the test does, and for demonstrating the test. The  
calculator’s on-line help provides a description of what  
the example data represents.  
Getting started with the Inference aplet  
This example describes the Inference aplet’s options and  
functionality by stepping you through an example using  
the example data for the Z-Test on 1 mean.  
Open the  
Inference aplet  
1. Open the Inference aplet.  
Select Inference  
.
The Inference aplet  
opens in the Symbolic  
view.  
Inference aplet  
11-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Inference aplet’s SYMB view keys  
The table below summarizes the options available in  
Symbolic view.  
Hypothesis  
Tests  
Confidence Intervals  
Z: 1 μ, the Z-Test  
on 1 mean  
Z-Int: 1 μ, the confidence  
interval for 1 mean, based on  
the Normal distribution  
Z: μ μ , the  
Z-Int: μ μ , the confidence  
1
2
1
2
Z-Test on the  
difference of two  
means  
interval for the difference of  
two means, based on the  
Normal distribution  
Z: 1 π, the Z-Test  
on 1 proportion  
Z-Int: 1 π, the confidence  
interval for 1 proportion,  
based on the Normal  
distribution  
Z: π1 – π2, the  
Z-Test on the  
difference in two  
proportions  
Z-Int: π1 – π2, the confidence  
interval for the difference of  
two proportions, based on the  
Normal distribution  
T: 1 μ, the T-Test on  
1 mean  
T-Int: 1 μ, the confidence  
interval for 1 mean, based on  
the Student’s t-distribution  
T: μ μ , the T-  
T-Int: μ μ , the confidence  
1
2
1
2
Test on the  
difference of two  
means  
interval for the difference of  
two means, based on the  
Student’s t-distribution  
If you choose one of the hypothesis tests, you can choose  
the alternative hypothesis to test against the null  
hypothesis. For each test, there are three possible choices  
for an alternative hypothesis based on a quantitative  
comparison of two quantities. The null hypothesis is  
always that the two quantities are equal.Thus, the  
alternative hypotheses cover the various cases for the two  
quantities being unequal: <, >, and .  
In this section, we will use the example data for the Z-Test  
on 1 mean to illustrate how the aplet works and what  
features the various views present.  
11-2  
Inference aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Select the  
inferential  
method  
2. Select the HypothesisTest inferential method.  
Select HYPOTH TEST  
3. Define the type of test.  
Z–Test:1 μ  
4. Select an alternative hypothesis.  
μ< μ0  
Enter data  
5. Enter the sample statistics and population  
parameters.  
setup-NUM  
The table below lists the fields in this view for our current  
Z-Test:1 μ example.  
Field  
Definition  
name  
μ0  
Assumed population mean  
Population standard deviation  
Sample mean  
σ
x
n
α
Sample size  
Alpha level for the test  
Inference aplet  
11-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
By default, each field already contains a value.  
These values constitute the example database and  
are explained in the  
feature of this aplet.  
Display on-line  
help  
6. To display the on-line  
help, press  
7. To close the on-line help,  
press  
.
Display test  
results in  
numeric format  
8. Display the test results in numeric format.  
The test distribution value  
and its associated  
probability are  
displayed, along with  
the critical value(s) of the test and the associated  
critical value(s) of the statistic.  
Note: You can access the on-line help in Numeric  
view.  
Plot test results  
9. Display a graphic view of the test results.  
Horizontal axes are  
presented for both the  
distribution variable and  
the test statistic. A  
generic bell curve represents the probability  
distribution function. Vertical lines mark the critical  
value(s) of the test, as well as the value of the test  
R
statistic. The rejection region is marked  
and the  
test numeric results are displayed between the  
horizontal axes.  
Importing sample statistics from the Statistics aplet  
The Inference aplet supports the calculation of confidence  
intervals and the testing of hypotheses based on data in  
the Statistics aplet. Computed statistics for a sample of  
data in a column in any Statistics-based aplet can be  
imported for use in the Inference aplet. The following  
example illustrates the process.  
11-4  
Inference aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A calculator produces the following 6 random numbers:  
0.529, 0.295, 0.952, 0.259, 0.925, and 0.592  
Open the  
Statistics aplet  
1. Open the Statistics aplet and reset the current  
settings.  
Select  
Statistics  
The Statistics aplet opens in the Numeric view.  
Enter data  
2. In the C1 column, enter the random numbers  
produced by the calculator.  
529  
295  
952  
259  
925  
592  
H I N T  
If the Decimal Mark setting in the Modes input form  
(
modes) is set to Comma, use  
instead of  
.
3. If necessary, select 1-variable statistics. Do this by  
pressing the fifth menu key until  
as its menu label.  
is displayed  
Calculate  
statistics  
4. Calculate statistics.  
The mean of 0.592  
seems a little large  
compared to the  
expected value of 0.5. To see if the difference is  
statistically significant, we will use the statistics  
computed here to construct a confidence interval for  
the true mean of the population of random numbers  
and see whether or not this interval contains 0.5.  
5. Press  
to close the computed statistics window.  
Inference aplet  
11-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Open Inference  
aplet  
6. Open the Inference aplet and clear current settings.  
Select  
Inference  
Select inference  
method and  
type  
7. Select an inference method.  
Select CONF INTERVAL  
8. Select a distribution statistic type.  
Select T-Int: 1μ  
Set up the  
interval  
calculation  
9. Set up the interval calculation. Note: The default  
values are derived from sample data from the on-line  
help example.  
Setup-NUM  
11-6  
Inference aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Import the data  
10.Import the data from the Statistics aplet. Note: The  
data from C1 is displayed by default.  
Note: Press  
to see  
the statistics before  
importing them into the  
Numeric Setup view.  
Also, if there is more than one aplet based on the  
Statistics aplet, you are prompted to choose one.  
11.Specify a 90%  
confidence interval in the C: field.  
to move to  
the C: field  
0.9  
DisplayNumeric 12.Display the confidence interval in the Numeric view.  
Note: The interval setting is 0.5.  
view  
Display Plot  
view  
13.Display the confidence interval in the Plot view.  
You can see, from the  
second text row, that the  
mean is contained within the 90% confidence  
interval (CI) of 0.3469814 to 0.8370186.  
Note: The graph is a simple, generic bell-curve. It is  
not meant to accurately represent the t-distribution  
with 5 degrees of freedom.  
Inference aplet  
11-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hypothesis tests  
You use hypothesis tests to test the validity of hypotheses  
that relate to the statistical parameters of one or two  
populations. The tests are based on statistics of samples  
of the populations.  
The HP 39gs hypothesis tests use the Normal  
Z-distribution or Student’s t-distribution to calculate  
probabilities.  
One-Sample Z-Test  
Menu name  
Z-Test: 1 μ  
On the basis of statistics from a single sample, the  
One-Sample Z-Test measures the strength of the evidence  
for a selected hypothesis against the null hypothesis. The  
null hypothesis is that the population mean equals a  
specified value Η : μ = μ .  
0
0
You select one of the following alternative hypotheses  
against which to test the null hypothesis:  
H1:μ1 < μ2  
H1:μ1 > μ2  
H1:μ1 ≠ μ2  
Inputs  
The inputs are:  
Field name  
Definition  
x
n
Sample mean.  
Sample size.  
μ
Hypothetical population mean.  
Population standard deviation.  
Significance level.  
0
σ
α
11-8  
Inference aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Results  
The results are:  
Result  
Test Z  
Prob  
Description  
Z-test statistic.  
Probability associated with the  
Z-Test statistic.  
Critical Z  
Boundary values of Z  
associated with the α level that  
you supplied.  
Boundary values of x required  
by the α value that you  
supplied.  
Critical x  
Two-Sample Z-Test  
Menu name  
Z-Test: μ1–μ2  
On the basis of two samples, each from a separate  
population, this test measures the strength of the evidence  
for a selected hypothesis against the null hypothesis. The  
null hypothesis is that the mean of the two populations are  
equal (H : μ1= μ2).  
0
You select one of the following alternative hypotheses  
against which to test the null hypothesis:  
H1:μ1 < μ2  
H1:μ1 > μ2  
H1:μ1 ≠ μ2  
Inputs  
The inputs are:  
Field name  
Definition  
Sample 1 mean.  
x1  
Sample 2 mean.  
x2  
n1  
n2  
σ1  
Sample 1 size.  
Sample 2 size.  
Population 1 standard  
deviation.  
Inference aplet  
11-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Field name  
Definition (Continued)  
σ2  
Population 2 standard  
deviation.  
α
Significance level.  
Results  
The results are:  
Result  
Test Z  
Prob  
Description  
Z-Test statistic.  
Probability associated with the  
Z-Test statistic.  
Critical Z  
Boundary value of Z  
associated with the α level that  
you supplied.  
One-Proportion Z-Test  
Menu name  
Z-Test: 1π  
On the basis of statistics from a single sample, this test  
measures the strength of the evidence for a selected  
hypothesis against the null hypothesis. The null hypothesis  
is that the proportion of successes in the two populations  
is equal: H :π =π  
0
0
You select one of the following alternative hypotheses  
against which to test the null hypothesis:  
H1:π < π0  
H1:π > π0  
H1:π ≠ π0  
11-10  
Inference aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inputs  
The inputs are:  
Field name  
Definition  
x
n
Number of successes in the sample.  
Sample size.  
π
Population proportion of successes.  
Significance level.  
0
α
Results  
The results are:  
Result  
Test P  
Test Z  
Prob  
Description  
Proportion of successes in the sample.  
Z-Test statistic.  
Probability associated with the Z-Test  
statistic.  
Critical Z  
Boundary value of Z associated with  
the level you supplied.  
Two-Proportion Z-Test  
Menu name  
Z-Test: π1 – π2  
On the basis of statistics from two samples, each from a  
different population, the Two-Proportion Z-Test measures  
the strength of the evidence for a selected hypothesis  
against the null hypothesis. The null hypothesis is that the  
proportion of successes in the two populations is equal  
H0: π = π .  
1
2
You select one of the following alternative hypotheses  
against which to test the null hypothesis:  
H1:π1 < π2  
H1:π1 > π2  
H1:π1 ≠ π2  
Inference aplet  
11-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Inputs  
The inputs are:  
Field name  
Definition  
X1  
X2  
n1  
n2  
α
Sample 1 mean.  
Sample 2 mean.  
Sample 1 size.  
Sample 2 size.  
Significance level.  
Results  
The results are:  
Result  
Description  
Test π1–π2  
Difference between the  
proportions of successes in the  
two samples.  
Test Z  
Prob  
Z-Test statistic.  
Probability associated with the  
Z-Test statistic.  
Critical Z  
Boundary values of Z  
associated with the α level that  
you supplied.  
One-Sample T-Test  
Menu name  
T-Test: 1 μ  
The One-sample T-Test is used when the population  
standard deviation is not known. On the basis of statistics  
from a single sample, this test measures the strength of the  
evidence for a selected hypothesis against the null  
hypothesis. The null hypothesis is that the sample mean  
has some assumed value,  
Η
:μ = μ  
0
0
You select one of the following alternative hypotheses  
against which to test the null hypothesis:  
H1:μ < μ0  
H1:μ > μ0  
H1:μ ≠ μ0  
11-12  
Inference aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Inputs  
The inputs are:  
Field name  
Definition  
Sample mean.  
x
Sx  
n
Sample standard deviation.  
Sample size.  
μ0  
α
Hypothetical population mean.  
Significance level.  
Results  
The results are:  
Result  
Test T  
Prob  
Description  
T-Test statistic.  
Probability associated with the  
T-Test statistic.  
Critical T  
Boundary value of T associated  
with the α level that you  
supplied.  
Boundary value of x required  
by the α value that you  
supplied.  
Critical x  
Inference aplet  
11-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Two-Sample T-Test  
Menu name  
T-Test: μ1 – μ2  
The Two-sample T-Test is used when the population  
standard deviation is not known. On the basis of statistics  
from two samples, each sample from a different  
population, this test measures the strength of the evidence  
for a selected hypothesis against the null hypothesis. The  
null hypothesis is that the two populations means are  
equal H : μ = μ .  
0
1
2
You select one of the following alternative hypotheses  
against which to test the null hypothesis  
H1:μ1 < μ2  
H1:μ1 > μ2  
H1:μ1 ≠ μ2  
Inputs  
The inputs are:  
Field  
name  
Definition  
Sample 1 mean.  
Sample 2 mean.  
x1  
x2  
S1  
S2  
n1  
n2  
α
Sample 1 standard deviation.  
Sample 2 standard deviation.  
Sample 1 size.  
Sample 2 size.  
Significance level.  
_Pooled? Check this option to pool samples  
based on their standard deviations.  
11-14  
Inference aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Results  
The results are:  
Result  
Test T  
Prob  
Description  
T-Test statistic.  
Probability associated with the T-Test  
statistic.  
Critical T  
Boundary values of T associated with  
the α level that you supplied.  
Confidence intervals  
The confidence interval calculations that the HP 39gs can  
perform are based on the Normal Z-distribution or  
Student’s t-distribution.  
One-Sample Z-Interval  
Menu name  
Z-INT: μ 1  
This option uses the Normal Z-distribution to calculate a  
confidence interval for m, the true mean of a population,  
when the true population standard deviation, s, is known.  
Inputs  
The inputs are:  
Field  
Definition  
name  
Sample mean.  
x
σ
n
C
Population standard deviation.  
Sample size.  
Confidence level.  
Inference aplet  
11-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Results  
The results are:  
Result  
Critical Z  
μ min  
Description  
Critical value for Z.  
Lower bound for μ.  
Upper bound for μ.  
μ max  
Two-Sample Z-Interval  
Menu name  
Z-INT: μ1μ2  
This option uses the Normal Z-distribution to calculate a  
confidence interval for the difference between the means  
of two populations, μ μ , when the population standard  
1
2
deviations, σ and σ , are known.  
1
2
Inputs  
The inputs are:  
Field  
Definition  
name  
Sample 1 mean.  
Sample 2 mean.  
x1  
x2  
n1  
n2  
σ1  
σ2  
C
Sample 1 size.  
Sample 2 size.  
Population 1 standard deviation.  
Population 2 standard deviation.  
Confidence level.  
Results  
The results are:  
Result  
Description  
Critical Z  
Critical value for Z.  
Lower bound for μ μ .  
Δ μ Min  
Δ μ Max  
1
2
Upper bound for μ μ .  
1
2
11-16  
Inference aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
One-Proportion Z-Interval  
Menu name  
Z-INT: 1 π  
This option uses the Normal Z-distribution to calculate a  
confidence interval for the proportion of successes in a  
population for the case in which a sample of size, n, has  
a number of successes, x.  
Inputs  
The inputs are:  
Field  
Definition  
name  
x
n
C
Sample success count.  
Sample size.  
Confidence level.  
Results  
The results are:  
Result  
Critical Z  
π Min  
Description  
Critical value for Z.  
Lower bound for π.  
Upper bound for π.  
π Max  
Two-Proportion Z-Interval  
Menu name  
Z-INT: π1 – π2  
This option uses the Normal Z-distribution to calculate a  
confidence interval for the difference between the  
proportions of successes in two populations.  
Inputs  
The inputs are:  
Field  
Definition  
name  
Sample 1 success count.  
Sample 2 success count.  
x1  
x2  
Inference aplet  
11-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Field  
Definition (Continued)  
name  
n1  
n2  
C
Sample 1 size.  
Sample 2 size.  
Confidence level.  
Results  
The results are:  
Result  
Description  
Critical Z  
Critical value for Z.  
Lower bound for the difference between  
the proportions of successes.  
Δ π Min  
Upper bound for the difference between  
the proportions of successes.  
Δ π Max  
One-Sample T-Interval  
Menu name  
T-INT: 1 μ  
This option uses the Student’s t-distribution to calculate a  
confidence interval for m, the true mean of a population,  
for the case in which the true population standard  
deviation, s, is unknown.  
Inputs  
The inputs are:  
Field  
Definition  
name  
Sample mean.  
x1  
Sx  
n
Sample standard deviation.  
Sample size.  
C
Confidence level.  
11-18  
Inference aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Results  
The results are:  
Result  
Critical T  
μ Min  
Description  
Critical value for T.  
Lower bound for μ.  
Upper bound for μ.  
μ Max  
Two-Sample T-Interval  
Menu name  
T-INT: μ1 – μ2  
This option uses the Student’s t-distribution to calculate a  
confidence interval for the difference between the means  
of two populations, μ1 – μ2, when the population  
standard deviations, s1and s2, are unknown.  
Inputs  
The inputs are:  
Field  
Definition  
name  
Sample 1 mean.  
Sample 2 mean.  
x1  
x2  
s1  
Sample 1 standard deviation.  
Sample 2 standard deviation.  
Sample 1 size.  
s2  
n1  
n2  
Sample 2 size.  
C
Confidence level.  
_Pooled  
Whether or not to pool the samples  
based on their standard deviations.  
Inference aplet  
11-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Results  
The results are:  
Result  
Description  
Critical T  
Critical value for T.  
Lower bound for μ μ .  
Δ μ Min  
Δ μ Max  
1
2
Upper bound for μ μ .  
1
2
11-20  
Inference aplet  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
Using the Finance Solver  
The Finance Solver, or Finance aplet, is available by  
using the APLET key in your calculator. Use the up and  
down arrow keys to select the Finance aplet. Your screen  
should look as follows:  
Press the  
key or the  
soft menu key to  
activate the aplet. The resulting screen shows the different  
elements involved in the solution of financial problems  
with your HP 39gs calculator.  
Background information on and applications of financial  
calculations are provided next.  
Background  
The Finance Solver application provides you with the  
ability of solving time-value-of-money (TVM) and  
amortization problems. These problems can be used for  
calculations involving compound interest applications as  
well as amortization tables.  
Compound interest is the process by which earned  
interest on a given principal amount is added to the  
principal at specified compounding periods, and then the  
Using the Finance Solver  
12-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
combined amount earns interest at a certain rate.  
Financial calculations involving compound interest  
include savings accounts, mortgages, pension funds,  
leases, and annuities.  
Time Value of Money (TVM) calculations, as the name  
implies, make use of the notion that a dollar today will be  
worth more than a dollar sometime in the future. A dollar  
today can be invested at a certain interest rate and  
generate a return that the same dollar in the future cannot.  
This TVM principle underlies the notion of interest rates,  
compound interest and rates of return.  
TVM transactions can be represented by using cash flow  
diagrams. A cash flow diagram is a time line divided into  
equal segments representing the compounding periods.  
Arrows represent the cash flows, which could be positive  
(upward arrows) or negative (downward arrows),  
depending on the point of view of the lender or borrower.  
The following cash flow diagram shows a loan from a  
borrower's point of view:  
Present value (PV)  
(Loan)  
Money  
Equal periods  
received is  
a positive  
number  
1
2
3
4
5
(PMT)  
Payment Payment Payment  
(PMT) (PMT) (PMT)  
Payment  
(PMT)  
Money  
Future value  
(FV)  
paid out is  
a negative  
number  
Equal payments  
On the other hand, the following cash flow diagram  
shows a load from the lender's point of view:  
Equal payments  
FV  
PMT  
PMT  
PMT PMT  
4
PMT  
1
2
3
5
Loan  
}
Equal periods  
PV  
In addition, cash flow diagrams specify when payments  
occur relative to the compounding periods: at the  
beginning of each period or at the end. The Finance  
Solver application provides both of these payment  
modes: Begin mode and End mode. The following cash  
12-2  
Using the Finance Solver  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
flow diagram shows lease payments at the beginning of  
each period.  
PV  
Capitalized  
value of  
lease  
}
1
2
3
4
5
PMT  
PMT PMT PMT  
PMT  
FV  
The following cash flow diagram shows deposits into an  
account at the end of each period.  
FV  
1
2
3
4
5
PMT PMT PMT PMT  
PMT  
PV  
As these cash-flow diagrams imply, there are five TVM  
variables:  
N
The total number of compounding periods  
or payments.  
I%YR  
The nominal annual interest rate (or  
investment rate). This rate is divided by  
the number of payments per year (P/YR)  
to compute the nominal interest rate per  
compounding period -- which is the  
interest rate actually used in TVM  
calculations.  
The present value of the initial cash flow.  
To a lender or borrower, PV is the amount  
of the loan; to an investor, PV is the initial  
investment. PV always occurs at the  
beginning of the first period.  
PV  
Using the Finance Solver  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-3  
The periodic payment amount. The  
payments are the same amount each  
period and the TVM calculation assumes  
that no payments are skipped. Payments  
can occur at the beginning or the end of  
each compounding period -- an option  
you control by setting the Payment mode  
to Beg or End.  
PMT  
The future value of the transaction: the  
amount of the final cash flow or the  
compounded value of the series of  
previous cash flows. For a loan, this is the  
size of the final balloon payment (beyond  
any regular payment due). For an  
investment this is the cash value of an  
investment at the end of the investment  
period.  
FV  
Performing TVM calculations  
1. Launch the Financial Solver as indicated at the  
beginning of this section.  
2. Use the arrow keys to highlight the different fields and  
enter the known variables in the TVM calculations,  
pressing the  
soft-menu key after entering each  
known value. Be sure that values are entered for at  
least four of the five TVM variables (namely, N, I%YR,  
PV, PMT, and FV).  
3. If necessary, enter a different value for P/YR (default  
value is 12, i.e., monthly payments).  
4. Press the key  
to change the Payment mode (Beg  
or End) as required.  
5. Use the arrow keys to highlight the TVM variable you  
wish to solve for and press the  
soft-menu key.  
12-4  
Using the Finance Solver  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example 1 - Loan calculations  
Suppose you finance the purchase of a car with a 5-year  
loan at 5.5% annual interest, compounded monthly. The  
purchase price of the car is $19,500, and the down  
payment is $3,000. What are the required monthly  
payments? What is the largest loan you can afford if your  
maximum monthly payment is $300? Assume that the  
payments start at the end of the first period.  
Solution. The following cash flow diagram illustrates the  
loan calculations:  
FV = 0  
l%YR = 5.5  
PV = $16,500  
N = 5 x 12 = 60  
P/YR = 12; End mode  
1
2
59  
60  
PMT = ?  
Start the Finance Solver, selecting P/YR = 12 and End  
payment option.  
Enter the known TVM variables as shown in the  
diagram above. Your input form should look as  
follows:  
Highlighting the PMT field, press the  
menu key to obtain a payment of -315.17 (i.e., PMT  
= -$315.17).  
soft  
To determine the maximum loan possible if the  
monthly payments are only $300, type the value  
–300 in the PMT field, highlight the PV field, and  
press the soft menu key. The resulting value is  
PV = $15,705.85.  
Using the Finance Solver  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-5  
Example 2 - Mortgage with balloon payment  
Suppose you have taken out a 30-year, $150,000 house  
mortgage at 6.5% annual interest. You expect to sell the  
house in 10 years, repaying the loan in a balloon  
payment. Find the size of the balloon payment, the value  
of the mortgage after 10 years of payment.  
Solution. The following cash flow diagram illustrates the  
case of the mortgage with balloon payment:  
l%YR = 6.5  
PV = $150,000  
N = 30 x 12 = 360 (for PMT)  
N = 10 x 12 = 120 (for balloon payment)  
P/YR = 12; End mode  
1
2
59  
60  
PMT = ?  
Balloon payment,  
FV = ?  
Start the Finance Solver, selecting P/YR = 12 and  
End payment option.  
Enter the known TVM variables as shown in the  
diagram above. Your input form, for calculating  
monthly payments for the 30-yr mortgage, should  
look as follows:  
Highlighting the PMT field, press the  
menu key to obtain a payment of -948.10 (i.e., PMT  
= -$948.10)  
soft  
To determine the balloon payment or future value (FV)  
for the mortgage after 10 years, use N = 120,  
highlight the FV field, and press the  
soft menu  
key. The resulting value is FV = -$127,164.19. The  
negative value indicates a payment from the  
homeowner. Check that the required balloon  
payments at the end of 20 years (N=240) and 25  
years (N = 300) are -$83,497.92 and  
-$48,456.24, respectively.  
12-6  
Using the Finance Solver  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Calculating Amortizations  
Amortization calculations, which also use the TVM  
variables, determine the amounts applied towards  
principal and interest in a payment or series of payments.  
To calculate amortizations:  
1. Start the Finance Solver as indicated at the beginning  
of this section.  
2. Set the following TVM variables:  
a
b
Number of payments per year (P/YR)  
Payment at beginning or end of periods  
3. Store values for the TVM variables I%YR, PV, PMT,  
and FV, which define the payment schedule.  
4. Press the  
soft menu key and enter the  
number of payments to amortize in this batch.  
5. Press the  
soft menu key to amortize a batch of  
payments. The calculator will provide for you the  
amount applied to interest, to principal, and the  
remaining balance after this set of payments have  
been amortized.  
Example 3 - Amortization for home mortgage  
For the data of Example 2 above, find the amortization of  
the loan after the first 10 years (12x10 = 120 payments).  
Pressing the  
screen to the left. Enter 120 in the PAYMENTS field, and  
press the soft menu key to produce the results  
shown to the right.  
soft menu key produces the  
To continue amortizing the loan:  
1. Press the  
soft menu key to store the new  
balance after the previous amortization as PV.  
2. Enter the number of payments to amortize in the new  
batch.  
Using the Finance Solver  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-7  
3. Press the  
soft menu key to amortize the new  
batch of payments. Repeat steps 1 through 3 as  
often as needed.  
Example 4 - Amortization for home mortgage  
For the results of Example 3, show the amortization of the  
next 10 years of the mortgage loan. First, press the  
soft menu key. Then, keeping 120 in the PAYMENTS  
field, press the  
shown below.  
soft menu key to produce the results  
To amortize a series of future payments starting at payment p:  
1. Calculate the balance of the loan at payment p-1.  
2. Store the new balance in PV using the  
menu key.  
soft  
3. Amortize the series of payments starting at the new  
PV.  
The amortization operation reads the values from the  
TVM variables, rounds the numbers it gets from PV and  
PMT to the current display mode, then calculates the  
amortization rounded to the same setting. The original  
variables are not changed, except for PV, which is  
updated after each amortization.  
12-8  
Using the Finance Solver  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13  
Using mathematical functions  
Math functions  
The HP 39gs contains many math functions. The functions  
are grouped in categories. For example, the Matrix  
category contains functions for manipulating matrices.  
The Probability category (shown as Prob.on the MATH  
menu) contains functions for working with probability.  
To use a math function, you enter the function onto the  
command line, and include the arguments in parentheses  
after the function. You can also select a math function  
from the MATH menu.  
The MATH menu  
The MATH menu provides access to math functions,  
physical constants, and programming constants.  
The MATH menu is organized by category. For each  
category of functions on the left, there is a list of function  
names on the right. The highlighted category is the  
current category.  
When you press  
, you see the menu list of  
Math categories in the left column and the  
corresponding functions of the highlighted category  
in the right column. The menu key  
indicates  
that the MATH FUNCTIONS menu list is active.  
To select a function  
1. Press  
to display the MATH menu. The  
categories appear in alphabetical order. Press  
or  
to scroll through the categories. To skip directly to  
a category, press the first letter of the category’s  
name. Note: You do not need to press  
first.  
Using mathematical functions  
13-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. The list of functions (on the right) applies to the  
currently highlighted category (on the left). Use  
and  
to switch between the category list and the  
function list.  
3. Highlight the name of the function you want and  
press  
. This copies the function name (and an  
initial parenthesis, if appropriate) to the edit line.  
Function categories  
Calculus  
Loop  
Symbolic  
Tests  
Complex  
numbers  
Matrix  
Polynomial  
Probability  
Trigonometry  
(Trig)  
Constant  
Convert  
Real numbers  
(Real)  
Hyperbolic  
trigonometry  
(Hyperb.)  
Two-variable  
statistics  
(Stat-Two)  
Lists  
Math functions by category  
Syntax  
Each function’s definition includes its syntax, that is, the  
exact order and spelling of a function’s name, its  
delimiters (punctuation), and its arguments. Note that the  
syntax for a function does not require spaces.  
Functions common to keyboard and menus  
These functions are common to the keyboard and MATH  
menu.  
For a description, see “π” on  
page 13-8.  
π
For a description, see ARG” on  
page 13-7.  
ARG  
For a description, see “ ” on  
page 11-7.  
For a description, see AND” on  
page 13-19.  
AND  
13-2  
Using mathematical functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
For a description, see  
!
“COMB(5,2) returns 10. That is,  
there are ten different ways that  
five things can be combined two  
at a time.!” on page 13-12.  
For a description, see “Σ” on  
page 13-11.  
For a description, see “Scientific  
notation (powers of 10)” on  
page 1-20.  
EEX  
For a description, see “ ” on  
page 11-7.  
The multiplicative inverse  
function finds the inverse of a  
square matrix, and the  
x–1  
multiplicative inverse of a real or  
complex number. Also works on  
a list containing only these object  
types.  
Keyboard functions  
The most frequently used functions are available directly  
from the keyboard. Many of the keyboard functions also  
accept complex numbers as arguments.  
,
,
,
Add, Subtract, Multiply, Divide. Also accepts complex  
numbers, lists and matrices.  
value1+ value2, etc.  
x
e
Natural exponential. Also accepts complex numbers.  
e^value  
Example  
e^5returns 148.413159103  
Natural logarithm. Also accepts complex numbers.  
LN(value)  
Example  
LN(1)returns 0  
Using mathematical functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13-3  
         
x
10  
Exponential (antilogarithm). Also accepts complex  
numbers.  
10^value  
Example  
10^3 returns 1000  
Common logarithm. Also accepts complex numbers.  
LOG(value)  
Example  
LOG(100) returns 2  
,
,
Sine, cosine, tangent. Inputs and outputs depend on the  
current angle format (Degrees, Radians, or Grads).  
SIN(value)  
COS(value)  
TAN(value)  
Example  
TAN(45) returns 1 (Degrees mode).  
–1  
ASIN  
Arc sine: sin x. Output range is from –90° to 90°, –π/2  
to π/2, or –100 to 100 grads. Inputs and outputs depend  
on the current angle format. Also accepts complex  
numbers.  
ASIN(value)  
Example  
ASIN(1) returns 90 (Degrees mode).  
–1  
ACOS  
Arc cosine: cos x. Output range is from 0° to 180°, 0 to  
π, or 0 to 200 grads. Inputs and outputs depend on the  
current angle format. Also accepts complex numbers.  
Output will be complex for values outside the normal  
COS domain of –1 x 1 .  
ACOS(value)  
Example  
ACOS(1)returns 0(Degrees mode).  
13-4  
Using mathematical functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
–1  
ATAN  
Arc tangent: tan x. Output range is from –90° to 90°,  
2π/2 to π/2, or –100 to 100 grads. Inputs and outputs  
depend on the current angle format. Also accepts  
complex numbers.  
ATAN(value)  
Example  
ATAN(1)returns 45(Degrees mode).  
Square. Also accepts complex numbers.  
2
value  
Example  
2
18 returns 324  
Square root. Also accepts complex numbers.  
value  
Example  
324 returns 18  
Negation. Also accepts complex numbers.  
value  
Example  
-(1,2) returns (-1,-2)  
Power (x raised to y). Also accepts complex numbers.  
value^power  
Example  
2^8 returns 256  
ABS  
Absolute value. For a complex number, this is x2 + y2 .  
ABS(value)  
ABS((x,y))  
Example  
ABS(–1) returns 1  
ABS((1,2))returns 2.2360679775  
Using mathematical functions  
13-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
n
Takes the nth root of x.  
root NTHROOT value  
Example  
3NTHROOT8 returns 2  
Calculus functions  
The symbols for differentiation and integration are  
available directly form the keyboard—  
respectively—as well as from the MATH menu.  
and S  
Differentiates expression with respect to the variable of  
differentiation. From the command line, use a formal  
name (S1, etc.) for a non-numeric result. See “Finding  
derivatives” on page 13-21.  
variable(expression)  
Example  
s1(s1 +3*s1)returns 2*s1+3  
2
Integrates expression from lower to upper limits with  
respect to the variable of integration. To find the definite  
integral, both limits must have numeric values (that is, be  
numbers or real variables). To find the indefinite integral,  
one of the limits must be a formal variable (s1, etc).  
(lower, upper, expression, variable)  
See “Using formal variables” on page 13-20 for  
further details.  
Example  
(0,s1,2*X+3,X)  
finds the indefinite result 3*s1+2*(s1^2/2)  
See “To find the indefinite integral using formal  
variables” on page 13-23 for more information on  
finding indefinite integrals.  
13-6  
Using mathematical functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
TAYLOR  
Calculates the nth order Taylor polynomial of expression  
at the point where the given variable = 0.  
TAYLOR(expression, variable, n)  
Example  
2
TAYLOR(1 + sin(s1) ,s1,5)with Radians  
angle measure and Fraction number format (set in  
MODES) returns 1+s1^2-1/3*s1^4.  
Complex number functions  
These functions are for complex numbers only. You can  
also use complex numbers with all trigonometric and  
hyperbolic functions, and with some real-number and  
keyboard functions. Enter complex numbers in the form  
(x,y), where x is the real part and y is the imaginary part.  
ARG  
Argument. Finds the angle defined by a complex number.  
Inputs and outputs use the current angle format set in  
Modes.  
ARG((x, y))  
Example  
ARG((3,3)) returns 45 (Degrees mode)  
CONJ  
Complex conjugate. Conjugation is the negation (sign  
reversal) of the imaginary part of a complex number.  
CONJ((x, y))  
Example  
CONJ((3,4)) returns (3,-4)  
IM  
RE  
Imaginary part, y, of a complex number, (x, y).  
IM ((x, y))  
Example  
IM((3,4)) returns 4  
Real part x, of a complex number, (x, y).  
RE((x, y))  
Example  
RE((3,4)) returns 3  
Using mathematical functions  
13-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Constants  
The constants available from the MATH FUNCTIONS  
menu are mathematical constants. These are described in  
this section. The hp 39gs has two other menus of  
constants: program constants and physical constants.  
These are described in “Program constants and physical  
constants” on page 13-24.  
e
Natural logarithm base. Internally represented as  
2.71828182846.  
e
i
Imaginary value for –1 , the complex number (0,1).  
i
MAXREAL  
Maximum real number. Internally represented as  
499  
9.99999999999 x10  
.
MAXREAL  
MINREAL  
Minimum real number. Internally represented as  
-499  
1x10  
.
MINREAL  
π
Internally represented as 3.14159265359.  
π
Conversions  
The conversion functions are found on the Convert  
menu. They enable you to make the following  
conversions.  
C  
F  
Convert from Fahrenheit to Celcius.  
Example  
C(212) returns 100  
Convert from Celcius to Fahrenheit.  
Example  
F(0) returns 32  
CM  
Convert from inches to centimeters.  
13-8  
Using mathematical functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
IN  
Convert from centimeters to inches.  
Convert from US gallons to liters.  
Convert from liters to US gallons.  
Convert from pounds to kilograms.  
Convert from kilograms to pounds.  
Convert from miles to kilometers.  
Convert from kilometers to miles.  
Convert from radians to degrees.  
Convert from degrees to radians.  
L  
LGAL  
KG  
LBS  
KM  
MILE  
DEG  
RAD  
Hyperbolic trigonometry  
The hyperbolic trigonometry functions can also take  
complex numbers as arguments.  
–1  
ACOSH  
ASINH  
ATANH  
COSH  
SINH  
Inverse hyperbolic cosine : cosh x.  
ACOSH(value)  
–1  
Inverse hyperbolic sine : sinh x.  
ASINH(value)  
–1  
Inverse hyperbolic tangent : tanh x.  
ATANH(value)  
Hyperbolic cosine  
COSH(value)  
Hyperbolic sine.  
SINH(value)  
TANH  
ALOG  
Hyperbolic tangent.  
TANH(value)  
Antilogarithm (exponential). This is more accurate than  
10^xdue to limitations of the power function.  
ALOG(value)  
Using mathematical functions  
13-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
EXP  
Natural exponential. This is more accurate than ex due  
to limitations of the power function.  
EXP(value)  
EXPM1  
LNP1  
Exponent minus 1 : ex – 1 . This is more accurate than  
EXP when x is close to zero.  
EXPM1(value)  
Natural log plus 1 : ln(x+1). This is more accurate than  
the natural logarithm function when xis close to zero.  
LNP1(value)  
List functions  
These functions work on list data. See “List functions” on  
page 16-6.  
Loop functions  
The loop functions display a result after evaluating an  
expression a given number of times.  
ITERATE  
Repeatedly for #times evaluates an expression in terms of  
variable. The value for variable is updated each time,  
starting with initialvalue.  
ITERATE(expression, variable, initialvalue,  
#times)  
Example  
2
ITERATE(X ,X,2,3) returns 256  
RECURSE  
Provides a method of defining a sequence without using  
the Symbolic view of the Sequence aplet. If used with |  
(“where”), RECURSE will step through the evaluation.  
RECURSE(sequencename, term , term , term )  
n
1
2
Example  
RECURSE(U,U(N-1)*N,1,2)  
U1(N)  
Stores a factorial-calculating function named U1.  
When you enter U1(5), for example, the function  
calculates 5! (120).  
13-10  
Using mathematical functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Σ
Summation. Finds the sum of expression with respect to  
variable from initialvalue to finalvalue.  
Σ(variable=initialvalue, finalvalue, expression)  
Example  
2
Σ(C=1,5,C )returns 55.  
Matrix functions  
These functions are for matrix data stored in matrix  
variables. See “Matrix functions and commands” on  
page 15-10.  
Polynomial functions  
Polynomials are products of constants (coefficients) and  
variables raised to powers (terms).  
POLYCOEF  
POLYEVAL  
POLYFORM  
Polynomial coefficients. Returns the coefficients of the  
polynomial with the specified roots.  
POLYCOEF([roots])  
Example  
To find the polynomial with roots 2, –3, 4, –5:  
POLYCOEF([2,-3,4,-5]) returns[1,2,-25,  
4
3
2
-26,120], representing x +2x –25x –26x+120.  
Polynomial evaluation. Evaluates a polynomial with the  
specified coefficients for the value of x.  
POLYEVAL([coefficients], value)  
Example  
4
3
2
For x +2x –25x –26x+120:  
POLYEVAL([1,2,-25,-26,120],8)returns  
3432.  
Polynomial form. Creates a polynomial in variable1 from  
expression.  
POLYFORM(expression, variable1)  
Example  
POLYFORM((X+1)^2+1,X)returns X^2+2*X+2.  
Using mathematical functions  
13-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
POLYROOT  
Polynomial roots. Returns the roots for the nth-order  
polynomial with the specified n+1 coefficients.  
POLYROOT([coefficients])  
Example  
4
3
2
For x +2x –25x –26x+120:  
POLYROOT([1,2,-25,-26,120])returns  
[2,-3,4,-5].  
H I N T  
The results of POLYROOT will often not be easily seen in  
HOME due to the number of decimal places, especially if  
they are complex numbers. It is better to store the results  
of POLYROOT to a matrix.  
For example, POLYROOT([1,0,0,-8]  
M1will  
store the three complex cube roots of 8 to matrix M1 as  
a complex vector. Then you can see them easily by going  
to the Matrix Catalog. and access them individually in  
calculations by referring to M1(1), M1(2) etc.  
Probability functions  
COMB  
Number of combinations (without regard to order) of n  
things taken r at a time: n!/(r!(n-r)).  
COMB(n, r)  
Example  
COMB(5,2) returns 10. That is, there are ten  
different ways that five things can be combined two  
at a time.!  
Factorial of a positive integer. For non-integers, ! = Γ(x +  
1). This calculates the gamma function.  
value!  
PERM  
Number of permutations (with regard to order) of n things  
taken r at a time: n!/(r!(n-r)!  
PERM(n, r)  
Example  
PERM(5,2) returns 20. That is, there are 20  
different permutations of five things taken two at a  
time.  
13-12  
Using mathematical functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
RANDOM  
Random number (between zero and 1). Produced by a  
pseudo-random number sequence. The algorithm used in  
the RANDOM function uses a seed number to begin its  
sequence. To ensure that two calculators must produce  
different results for the RANDOM function, use the  
RANDSEED function to seed different starting values  
before using RANDOM to produce the numbers.  
RANDOM  
H I N T  
The setting of Time will be different for each calculator, so  
using RANDSEED(Time) is guaranteed to produce a set of  
numbers which are as close to random as possible. You  
can set the seed using the command RANDSEED.  
UTPC  
UTPF  
Upper-Tail Chi-Squared Probability given degrees of  
freedom, evaluated at value. Returns the probability that  
2
a χ random variable is greater than value.  
UTPC(degrees, value)  
Upper-Tail Snedecor’s F Probability given numerator  
degrees of freedom and denominator degrees of freedom  
(of the F distribution), evaluated at value. Returns the  
probability that a Snedecor's F random variable is  
greater than value.  
UTPF(numerator, denominator, value)  
UTPN  
UTPT  
Upper-Tail Normal Probability given mean and variance,  
evaluated at value. Returns the probability that a normal  
random variable is greater than value for a normal  
distribution. Note: The variance is the square of the  
standard deviation.  
UTPN(mean, variance, value)  
Upper-Tail Student’s t-Probability given degrees of  
freedom, evaluated at value. Returns the probability that  
the Student's t- random variable is greater than value.  
UTPT(degrees, value)  
Real-number functions  
Some real-number functions can also take complex  
arguments.  
CEILING  
Smallest integer greater than or equal to value.  
CEILING(value)  
Using mathematical functions  
13-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Examples  
CEILING(3.2) returns 4  
CEILING(-3.2) returns -3  
DEGRAD  
Degrees to radians. Converts value from Degrees angle  
format to Radians angle format.  
DEGRAD(value)  
Example  
DEGRAD(180) returns 3.14159265359, the  
value of π.  
FLOOR  
Greatest integer less than or equal to value.  
FLOOR(value)  
Example  
FLOOR(-3.2) returns -4  
FNROOT  
Function root-finder (like the Solve aplet). Finds the value  
for the given variable at which expression most nearly  
evaluates to zero. Uses guess as initial estimate.  
FNROOT(expression, variable, guess)  
Example  
FNROOT(M*9.8/600-1,M,1) returns  
61.2244897959.  
FRAC  
Fractional part.  
FRAC(value)  
Example  
FRAC(23.2) returns .2  
HMS→  
Hours-minutes-seconds to decimal. Converts a number or  
expression in H.MMSSs format (time or angle that can  
include fractions of a second) to x.x format (number of  
hours or degrees with a decimal fraction).  
HMS(H.MMSSs)  
Example  
HMS(8.30) returns 8.5  
HMS  
Decimal to hours-minutes-seconds. Converts a number or  
expression in x.xformat (number of hours or degrees  
13-14  
Using mathematical functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
with a decimal fraction) to H.MMSSs format (time or  
angle up to fractions of a second).  
HMS(x.x)  
Example  
HMS(8.5) returns 8.3  
INT  
Integer part.  
INT(value)  
Example  
INT(23.2) returns 23  
MANT  
MAX  
Mantissa (significant digits) of value.  
MANT(value)  
Example  
MANT(21.2E34) returns 2.12  
Maximum. The greater of two values.  
MAX(value1, value2)  
Example  
MAX(210,25) returns 210  
MIN  
MOD  
%
Minimum. The lesser of two values.  
MIN(value1, value2)  
Example  
MIN(210,25)returns 25  
Modulo. The remainder of value1/value2.  
value1 MODvalue2  
Example  
9MOD 4 returns 1  
xpercent of y; that is, x/100*y.  
%(x, y)  
Example  
%(20,50) returns 10  
%CHANGE  
Percent change from x to y, that is, 100(y–x)/x.  
%CHANGE(x, y)  
Using mathematical functions  
13-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Example  
%CHANGE(20,50) returns 150  
%TOTAL  
Percent total : (100)y/x. What percentage of x, is y.  
%TOTAL(x, y)  
Example  
%TOTAL(20,50) returns 250  
RADDEG  
Radians to degrees. Converts value from radians to  
degrees.  
RADDEG(value)  
Example  
RADDEG(π) returns 180  
ROUND  
Rounds value to decimal places. Accepts complex  
numbers.  
ROUND(value, places)  
Round can also round to a number of significant digits as  
showed in example 2.  
Examples  
ROUND(7.8676,2) returns 7.87  
ROUND (0.0036757,-3) returns 0.00368  
SIGN  
Sign of value. If positive, the result is 1. If negative, –1. If  
zero, result is zero. For a complex number, this is the unit  
vector in the direction of the number.  
SIGN(value)  
SIGN((x, y))  
Examples  
SIGN (–2)returns –1  
SIGN((3,4)) returns (.6,.8)  
TRUNCATE  
Truncates value to decimal places. Accepts complex  
numbers.  
TRUNCATE(value, places)  
Example  
TRUNCATE(2.3678,2) returns 2.36  
13-16  
Using mathematical functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
XPON  
Exponent of value.  
XPON(value)  
Example  
XPON(123.4) returns 2  
Two-variable statistics  
These are functions for use with two-variable statistics.  
See “Two-variable” on page 10-15.  
Symbolic functions  
The symbolic functions are used for symbolic  
manipulations of expressions. The variables can be  
formal or numeric, but the result is usually in symbolic  
form (not a number). You will find the symbols for the  
symbolic functions = and | (where) in the CHARS menu  
(
CHARS) as well as the MATH menu.  
= (equals)  
ISOLATE  
Sets an equality for an equation. This is not a logical  
operator and does not store values. (See “Test functions”  
on page 13-18.)  
expression1=expression2  
Isolates the first occurrence of variable in expression=0  
and returns a new expression, where  
variable=newexpression. The result is a general solution  
that represents multiple solutions by including the (formal)  
variables S1 to represent any sign and n1 to represent  
any integer.  
ISOLATE(expression, variable)  
Examples  
ISOLATE(2*X+8,X) returns -4  
ISOLATE(A+B*X/C,X) returns -(A*C/B)  
LINEAR?  
Tests whether expression is linear for the specified  
variable. Returns 0(false) or 1(true).  
LINEAR?(expression, variable)  
Example  
LINEAR?((X^2-1)/(X+1),X) returns 0  
Using mathematical functions  
13-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
QUAD  
Solves quadratic expression=0 for variable and returns  
a new expression, where variable=newexpression. The  
result is a general solution that represents both positive  
and negative solutions by including the formal variable  
S1 to represent any sign: + or – .  
QUAD(expression, variable)  
Example  
2
QUAD((X-1) -7,X) returns  
(2+s1*5.29150262213)/2  
QUOTE  
Encloses an expression that should not be evaluated  
numerically.  
QUOTE(expression)  
Examples  
QUOTE(SIN(45))  
expression SIN(45) rather than the value of SIN(45).  
F1(X) stores the  
Another method is to enclose the expression in single  
quotes.  
For example, X^3+2*X  
F1(X)puts the  
expression X^3+2*X into F1(X)in the Function  
aplet.  
| (where)  
Evaluates expression where each given variable is set to  
the given value. Defines numeric evaluation of a symbolic  
expression.  
expression|(variable1=value1, variable2=value2,...)  
Example  
3*(X+1)|(X=3) returns 12.  
Test functions  
The test functions are logical operators that always return  
either a 1 (true) or a 0 (false).  
<
Less than. Returns 1 if true, 0 if false.  
value1<value2  
Less than or equal to. Returns 1 if true, 0 if false.  
value1value2  
13-18  
Using mathematical functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
= =  
Equals (logical test). Returns 1 if true, 0 if false.  
value1==value2  
>
Not equal to. Returns 1 if true, 0 if false.  
value1value2  
Greater than. Returns 1 if true, 0 if false.  
value1>value2  
Greater than or equal to. Returns 1 if true, 0 if false.  
value1value2  
AND  
Compares value1 and value2. Returns 1 if they are both  
non-zero, otherwise returns 0.  
value1 AND value2  
IFTE  
If expression is true, do the trueclause; if not, do the  
falseclause.  
IFTE(expression, trueclause, falseclause)  
Example  
2 3  
IFTE(X>0,X ,X )  
NOT  
OR  
Returns 1 if value is zero, otherwise returns 0.  
NOT value  
Returns 1 if either value1 or value2 is non-zero, otherwise  
returns 0.  
value1 OR value2  
XOR  
Exclusive OR. Returns 1 if either value1 or value2—but  
not both of them—is non-zero, otherwise returns 0.  
value1 XOR value2  
Trigonometry functions  
The trigonometry functions can also take complex  
numbers as arguments. For SIN, COS, TAN, ASIN,  
ACOS, and ATAN, see the Keyboard category.  
ACOT  
Arc cotangent.  
ACOT(value)  
Using mathematical functions  
13-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
ACSC  
ASEC  
COT  
CSC  
Arc cosecant.  
ACSC(value)  
Arc secant.  
ASEC(value)  
Cotangent: cosx/sinx.  
COT(value)  
Cosecant: 1/sinx  
CSC(value)  
SEC  
Secant: 1/cosx.  
SEC(value)  
Symbolic calculations  
The HP 39gs has the ability to perform symbolic  
calculations, for example, symbolic integration and  
differentiation. You can perform symbolic calculations in  
HOME and in the Function aplet.  
In HOME  
When you perform calculations that contain normal  
variables, the calculator substitutes values for any  
variables. For example, if you enter A+B on the command  
line and press  
, the calculator retrieves the values  
for A and B from memory and substitutes them in the  
calculation.  
Using formal  
variables  
To perform symbolic calculations, for example symbolic  
differentiations and integrations, you need to use formal  
names. The HP 39gs has six formal names available for  
use in symbolic calculations. These are S0 to S5. When  
you perform a calculation that contains a formal name,  
the HP 39gs does not carry out any substitutions.  
You can mix formal names and real variables. Evaluating  
2
(A+B+S1) will evaluate A+B, but not S1.  
If you need to evaluate an expression that contains formal  
names numerically, you use the | (where) command,  
listed in the Math menu under the Symbolic category.  
2
For example to evaluate (S1*S2) when S1=2 and  
S2=4, you would enter the calculation as follows:  
13-20  
Using mathematical functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
(The | symbol is in the CHARS menu: press  
CHARS.  
The = sign is listed in the MATH menu under Symbolic  
functions.)  
Symbolic  
You can perform symbolic operations in the Function  
aplet’s Symbolic view. For example, to find the derivative  
of a function in the Function aplet’s Symbolic view, you  
define two functions and define the second function as a  
derivative of the first function. You then evaluate the  
second function. See “To find derivatives in the Function  
aplet’s Symbolic view” on page 13-22 for an example.  
calculations in  
the Function  
aplet  
Finding derivatives  
The HP 39gs can perform symbolic differentiation on  
some functions. There are two ways of using the HP 39gs  
to find derivatives.  
You can perform differentiations in HOME by using  
the formal variables, S1 to S5.  
You can perform differentiations of functions of X in  
the Function aplet.  
To find derivatives  
in HOME  
To find the derivative of the function in HOME, use a  
formal variable in place of X. If you use X, the  
differentiation function substitutes the value that X holds,  
and returns a numeric result.  
For example, consider the function:  
dx(sin(x2 ) + 2cos(x))  
1. Enter the differentiation function onto the command  
line, substituting S1 in place of X.  
S1  
S1  
2
Using mathematical functions  
13-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
S1  
2. Evaluate the function.  
3. Show the result.  
To find derivatives  
in the Function  
aplet’s Symbolic  
view  
To find the derivative of the function in the Function aplet’s  
Symbolic view, you define two functions and define the  
second function as a derivative of the first function. For  
example, to differentiate sin(x2) + 2cosx :  
1. Access the Function aplet’s Symbolic view and define  
F1.  
2
2. Define F2(X) as the  
derivative of F(1).  
F1  
3. Select F2(X) and  
evaluate it.  
13-22  
Using mathematical functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4. Press  
to display  
the result. Note: Use  
the arrow keys to view  
the entire function.  
|
You could also just define  
F1(x)= dx(sin(x2) + 2cos(x)) .  
To find the  
For example, to find the indefinite integral of  
3x2 – 5dx use:  
indefinite integral  
using formal  
variables  
2
(
0, S1, 3 X 5, X  
)
1. Enter the function.  
0
S1  
X
3
5
X
2. Show the result format.  
3. Press  
to close the  
show window.  
4. Copy the result and  
evaluate.  
Thus, substituting X for S1, it can be seen that:  
x3  
----  
3
3x2 – 5dx= – 5x + 3  
---------------  
(X)  
X  
Using mathematical functions  
13-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
This result is derived from substituting X=S1 and X=0 into  
the original expression found in step 1. However,  
substituting X=0 will not always evaluate to zero and may  
result in an unwanted constant.  
(x 2)5  
To see this, consider: (x – 2)4dx=  
-------------------  
5
The ‘extra’ constant of 6.4  
results from the  
substitution of x = 0 into  
5
(x – 2) /5, and should be  
disregarded if an  
indefinite integral is  
required.  
Program constants and physical constants  
When you press  
, three menus of functions and  
constants become available:  
the math functions menu (which appears by default)  
the program constants menu, and  
the physical constants menu.  
The math functions menu is described extensively earlier  
in this chapter.  
Program constants  
The program constants are numbers that have been  
assigned to various calculator settings to enable you to  
test for or specify such a setting in a program. For  
example, the various display formats are assigned the  
following numbers:  
1 Standard  
2 Fixed  
3 Scientific  
4 Engineering  
5 Fraction  
6 Mixed fraction  
In a program, you could store the constant number of a  
particular format into a variable and then subsequently  
test for that particular format.  
13-24  
Using mathematical functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To access the menu of program constants:  
1. Press  
2. Press  
.
.
3. Use the arrow keys to navigate through the options.  
4. Click and then to display the number  
assigned to the option you selected in the previous  
step.  
The use of program constants is illustrated in more detail  
in “Programming” on page 18-1  
Physical constants  
There are 29 physical constants—from the fields of  
chemistry, physics and quantum mechanics—that you  
can use in calculations. A list of all these constants can be  
found in “Physical Constants” on page R-16.  
To access the menu of physical constants:  
1. Press  
2. Press  
.
.
3. Use the arrow keys to navigate through the options.  
4. To see the symbol and value of a selected constant,  
press  
. (Click  
to close the information  
window that appears.)  
The following example shows the information  
available about the speed of light (one of the physics  
constants).  
5. To use the selected constant in a calculation, press  
. The constant appears at the position of the  
cursor on the edit line.  
Using mathematical functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13-25  
   
Example  
Suppose you want to know the potential energy of a mass  
of 5 units according to the equation E = mc2 .  
1. Enter 5  
2. Press  
and then press  
.
3. Select light s...from the Physics menu.  
4. Press  
. The menu closes and the value of the  
selected constant is copied to the edit line.  
5. Complete the equation as you would normally and  
press  
to get the result.  
13-26  
Using mathematical functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
Variables and memory management  
Introduction  
The HP 39gs has approximately 200K of user memory.  
The calculator uses this memory to store variables,  
perform computations, and store history.  
A variable is an object that you create in memory to hold  
data. The hp 39gs has two types of variables, home  
variables and aplet variables.  
Home variables are available in all aplets. For  
example, you can store real numbers in variables A  
to Z and complex numbers in variables Z0 to Z9.  
These can be numbers you have entered, or the  
results of calculations. These variables are available  
within all aplets and within any programs.  
Aplet variables apply only to a single aplet. Aplets  
have specific variables allocated to them which vary  
from aplet to aplet.  
You use the calculator’s memory to store the following  
objects:  
copies of aplets with specific configurations  
new aplets that you download  
aplet variables  
home variables  
variables created through a catalog or editor, for  
example a matrix or a text note  
programs that you create.  
You can use the Memory Manager (  
MEMORY) to  
view the amount of memory available. The catalog views,  
which are accessible via the Memory Manager, can be  
used to transfer variables such as lists or matrices  
between calculators.  
Variables and memory management  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14-1  
               
Storing and recalling variables  
You can store numbers or expressions from a previous  
input or result into variables.  
Numeric Precision  
A number stored in a variable is always stored as a 12-  
digit mantissa with a 3-digit exponent. Numeric precision  
in the display, however, depends on the display mode  
(Standard, Fixed, Scientific, Engineering, or Fraction). A  
displayed number has only the precision that is  
displayed. If you copy it from the HOME view display  
history, you obtain only the precision displayed, not the  
full internal precision. On the other hand, the variable  
Ans always contains the most recent result to full  
precision.  
To store a value  
1. On the command line,  
enter the value or the  
calculation for the result  
you wish to store.  
2. Press  
3. Enter a name for the  
variable.  
4. Press  
.
To store the results  
of a calculation  
If the value you want to store is in the HOME view display  
history, for example the results of a previous calculation,  
you need to copy it to the command line, then store it.  
1. Perform the calculation for the result you want to store.  
3
3
8
6
2. Move the highlight to the result you wish to store.  
3. Press  
4. Press  
to copy the result to the command line.  
.
14-2  
Variables and memory management  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5. Enter a name for the variable.  
A
6. Press  
to store the result.  
The results of a calculation can also be stored directly to  
a variable. For example:  
2
5
3
B
To recall a value  
To recall a variable’s value, type the name of the variable  
and press  
.
A
To use variables in  
calculations  
You can use variables in calculations. The calculator  
substitutes the variable’s value in the calculation:  
65  
A
To clear a variable  
You can use the CLRVAR  
command to clear a  
specified variable. For  
example, if you have  
stored{1,2,3,4}invariable  
L1, entering CLRVAR L1  
will clear L1. (You can find the CLRVAR command  
by pressing  
category of commands.)  
and choosing the PROMPT  
Variables and memory management  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14-3  
     
The VARS menu  
You use the VARS menu to access all variables in the  
calculator. The VARS menu is organised by category. For  
each variable category in the left column, there is a list of  
variables in the right column. You select a variable  
category and then select a variable in the category.  
1. Open the VARS menu.  
2. Use the arrow keys or press the alpha key of the first  
letter in the category to select a variable category.  
For example, to select  
the Matrix category,  
press  
.
Note: In this instance,  
there is no need to  
press the ALPHA key.  
3. Move the highlight to the variables column.  
4. Use the arrow keys to select the variable that you  
want. For example, to select M2, press  
.
14-4  
Variables and memory management  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5. Choose whether to place the variable name or the  
variable value on the command line.  
Press  
to indicate that you want the  
variable’s contents to appear on the command  
line.  
Press  
to indicate that you want the  
variable’s name to appear on the command line.  
6. Press to place the value or name on the  
command line. The selected object appears on the  
command line.  
Note: The VARS menu can also be used to enter the  
names or values of variables into programs.  
Example  
This example demonstrates how to use the VARS menu to  
add the contents of two list variables, and to store the  
result in another list variable.  
1. Display the List Catalog.  
LIST  
to select L1  
2. Enter the data for L1.  
88  
65  
90  
70  
89  
3. Return to the List Catalog to create L2.  
LIST  
to select L2  
Variables and memory management  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14-5  
 
4. Enter data for L2.  
55  
90  
48  
77  
86  
5. Press  
to access HOME.  
6. Open the variable menu and select L1.  
7. Copy it to the command line. Note: Because the  
option is highlighted, the variable’s name,  
rather than its contents, is copied to the command  
line.  
8. Insert the + operator and select the L2 variable from  
the List variables.  
9. Store the answer in the List catalog L3 variable.  
L3  
Note: You can also  
type list names directly  
from the keyboard.  
14-6  
Variables and memory management  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Home variables  
It is not possible to store data of one type in a variable of  
another type. For example, you use the Matrix catalog to  
create matrices. You can create up to ten matrices, and  
you can store these in variables M0 to M9. You cannot  
store matrices in variables other than M0 to M9.  
Cate-  
gory  
Available names  
Complex Z0 to Z9  
For example, (1,2)  
Z1. You can enter a complex  
number by typing (r,i), where r represents  
the real part, and i represents the  
imaginary part.  
Graphic  
Library  
G0 to G9  
See“Graphic commands” on page 18-21  
for more information on storing graphic  
objects via programming commands. See  
“To store into a graphics variable” on  
page 17-5 for more information on  
storing graphic object via the sketch view.  
Aplet library variables can store aplets  
that you have created, either by saving a  
copy of a standard aplet, or downloading  
an aplet from another source.  
List  
L0 to L9  
For example, {1,2,3}  
M0 to M9 can store matrices or vectors.  
For example, [[1,2],[3,4]] M0.  
L1.  
Matrix  
Modes  
Modes variables store the modes settings  
that you can configure using  
MODES.  
Notepad Notepad variables store notes.  
Program  
Real  
Program variables store programs.  
A to Z and θ.  
For example, 7.45  
A.  
Variables and memory management  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14-7  
   
Aplet variables  
Most aplet variables store values that are unique to a  
particular aplet. These include symbolic expressions and  
equations (see below), settings for the Plot and Numeric  
views, and the results of some calculations such as roots  
and intersections.  
See the Reference Information chapter for more  
information about aplet variables.  
Category Available names  
Function  
F0 to F9 (Symbolic view). See “Function  
aplet variables” on page R-7.  
Parametric  
X0, Y0 to X9, Y9 (Symbolic view). See  
“Parametric aplet variables” on page  
R-8.  
Polar  
R0 to R9 (Symbolic view). See “Polar  
aplet variables” on page R-9.  
Sequence  
U0 to U9 (Symbolic view). See  
“Sequence aplet variables” on page  
R-10.  
Solve  
E0 to E9 (Symbolic view). See “Solve  
aplet variables” on page R-11.  
Statistics  
C0 to C9 (Numeric view). See  
“Statistics aplet variables” on page  
R-12.  
To access an aplet  
variable  
1. Open the aplet that contains the variable you want to  
recall.  
2. Press  
to display the VARS menu.  
3. Use the arrow keys to select a variable category in  
the left column, then press  
in the right column.  
to access the variables  
4. Use the arrow keys to select a variable in the right  
column.  
5. To copy the name of the variable onto the edit line,  
press  
. (  
is the default setting.)  
14-8  
Variables and memory management  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. To copy the value of the  
variable into the edit  
line, press  
press  
and  
.
Memory Manager  
You can use the Memory Manager to determine the  
amount of available memory on the calculator. You can  
also use Memory Manager to organize memory. For  
example, if the available memory is low, you can use the  
Memory Manager to determine which aplets or variables  
consume large amounts of memory. You can make  
deletions to free up memory.  
Example  
1. Start the Memory Manager. A list of variable  
categories is displayed.  
MEMORY  
Free memory is  
displayed in the top  
right corner and the  
body of the screen lists  
each category, the memory it uses, and the  
percentage of the total memory it uses.  
2. Select the category with which you want to work and  
press  
. Memory Manager displays memory  
details of variables within the category.  
3. To delete variables in a category:  
Press  
Press  
to delete the selected variable.  
CLEAR to delete all variables in the  
selected category.  
Variables and memory management  
14-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
Matrices  
Introduction  
You can perform matrix calculations in HOME and in  
programs. The matrix and each row of a matrix appear  
in brackets, and the elements and rows are separated by  
commas. For example, the following matrix:  
1 2 3  
4 5 6  
is displayed in the history as:  
[[1,2,3],[4,5,6]]  
(If the Decimal Mark mode is set to Comma, then separate  
each element and each row with a period.)  
You can enter matrices directly in the command line, or  
create them in the matrix editor.  
Vectors  
Vectors are one-dimensional arrays. They are composed  
of just one row. A vector is represented with single  
brackets; for example, [1,2,3]. A vector can be a real  
number vector or a complex number vector, for example  
[(1,2), (7,3)].  
Matrices  
Matrices are two-dimensional arrays. They are composed  
of more than one row and more than one column.  
Two-dimensional matrices are represented with nested  
brackets; for example, [[1,2,3],[4,5,6]]. You can create  
complex matrices, for example, [[(1,2), (3,4)], [(4,5),  
(6,7)]].  
Matrix Variables  
There are ten matrix variables available, named M0 to  
M9. You can use them in calculations in HOME or in a  
program. You can retrieve the matrix names from the  
VARS menu, or just type their names from the keyboard.  
Matrices  
15-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Creating and storing matrices  
You can create, edit,  
delete, send, and receive  
matrices in the Matrix  
catalog.  
To open the Matrix  
catalog, press  
MATRIX.  
You can also create and store matrices—named or  
unnamed—-in HOME. For example, the command:  
POLYROOT([1,0,–1,0])M1  
stores the root of the complex vector of length 3 into the  
M1 variable. M1 now contains the three roots of  
x3 x = 0  
Matrix Catalog  
keys  
The table below lists the operations of the menu keys in  
the Matrix Catalog, as well as the use of Delete (  
)
and Clear (  
CLEAR).  
Key  
Meaning  
Opens the highlighted matrix for  
editing.  
Prompts for a matrix type, then  
highlighted name.  
Transmits the highlighted matrix to  
another hp 39gs or a disk drive.  
See “Sending and receiving aplets”  
on page 19-4.  
Receives a matrix from another  
hp 39gs or a disk drive. See  
“Sending and receiving aplets” on  
page 19-4.  
Clears the highlighted matrix.  
Clears all matrices.  
CLEAR  
or  
Moves to the end or the beginning  
of the catalog.  
15-2  
Matrices  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To create a matrix  
in the Matrix  
Catalog  
1. Press  
MATRIX to open the Matrix Catalog. The  
Matrix catalog lists the 10 available matrix variables,  
M0 to M9.  
2. Highlight the matrix variable name you want to use  
and press  
.
3. Select the type of matrix to create.  
For a vector (one-dimensional array),  
select Realvectoror Complex vector.  
Certain operations (+, , CROSS) do not  
recognize a one-dimensional matrix as a vector,  
so this selection is important.  
For a matrix (two-dimensional array),  
select Realmatrix or Complexmatrix.  
4. For each element in the matrix, type a number or an  
expression, and press  
. (The expression may  
not contain symbolic variable names.)  
For complex numbers, enter each number in  
complex form; that is, (a, b), where a is the real part  
and b is the imaginary part. You must include the  
parentheses and the comma.  
5. Use the cursor keys to move to a different row or  
column. You can change the direction of the highlight  
bar by pressing  
. The  
menu key toggles  
between the following three options:  
specifies that the cursor moves to the cell  
below the current cell when you press  
.
specifies that the cursor moves to the cell to  
the right of the current cell when you press  
.
specifies that the cursor stays in the current  
cell when you press  
.
6. When done, press  
catalog, or press  
MATRIX to see the Matrix  
to return to HOME. The  
matrix entries are automatically stored.  
Matrices  
15-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A matrix is listed with two dimensions, even if it is 3×1. A  
vector is listed with the number of elements, such as 3.  
To transmit a  
matrix  
You can send matrices between calculators just as you  
can send aplets, programs, lists, and notes.  
1. Align the HP 39gs calculators’ infrared ports (or  
connect the calculators using an appropriate cable).  
2. Open the Matrix catalogs on both calculators.  
3. Highlight the matrix to send.  
4. Press  
and choose the method of sending  
(infrared or cable).  
5. Press  
on the receiving calculator and choose  
the method of receiving (infrared or cable).  
For more information on sending and receiving files, see  
“Sending and receiving aplets” on page 19-4.  
Working with matrices  
To edit a matrix  
In the Matrix catalog, highlight the name of the matrix  
you want to edit and press  
.
Matrix edit keys  
The following table lists the matrix edit key operations.  
Key  
Meaning  
Copies the highlighted element to  
the edit line.  
Inserts a row of zeros above, or a  
column of zeros to the left, of the  
highlighted cell. (You are prompted  
to choose row or column.)  
A three-way toggle for cursor  
advancement in the Matrix editor.  
advances to the right,  
advances downward, and  
does not advance at all.  
¸
Switches between larger and  
smaller font sizes.  
15-4  
Matrices  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Key  
Meaning (Continued)  
Deletes the highlighted cells, row,  
or column (you are prompted to  
make a choice).  
CLEAR  
Clears all elements from the matrix.  
Moves to the first row, last row, first  
column, or last column respectively.  
To display a matrix  
In the Matrix catalog (  
matrix name and press  
MATRIX), highlight the  
.
In HOME, enter the name of the matrix variable and  
press  
.
To display one  
element  
In HOME, enter matrixname(row,column). For example,  
if M2is [[3,4],[5,6]], then M2(1,2)  
4.  
returns  
To create a matrix  
in HOME  
1. Enter the matrix in the edit line. Start and end the  
matrix and each row with square brackets (the shifted  
and  
keys).  
2. Separate each element and each row with a comma.  
Example: [[1,2],[3,4]].  
3. Press  
to enter and display the matrix.  
The left screen below shows the matrix  
[[2.5,729],[16,2]]being stored into M5. The  
screen on the right shows the vector [66,33,11]being  
stored into M6. Note that you can enter an expression  
(like 5/2) for an element of the matrix, and it will be  
evaluated.  
Matrices  
15-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
To store one  
element  
In HOME, enter, value  
matrixname(row,column).  
For example, to change the element in the first row and  
second column of M5 to 728, then display the resulting  
matrix:  
728  
M5  
1
2
M5  
.
An attempt to store an element to a row or column beyond  
the size of the matrix results in an error message.  
Matrix arithmetic  
You can use the arithmetic functions (+, –, ×, / and  
powers) with matrix arguments. Division left-multiplies by  
the inverse of the divisor. You can enter the matrices  
themselves or enter the names of stored matrix variables.  
The matrices can be real or complex.  
For the next examples, store [[1,2],[3,4]] into M1 and  
[[5,6],[7,8]] into M2.  
Example  
1. Create the first matrix.  
MATRIX  
1
2
3
4
2. Create the second  
matrix.  
MATRIX  
5
6
7
8
15-6  
Matrices  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3. Add the matrices that  
you created.  
M1  
M2  
To multiply and  
divide by a scalar  
For division by a scalar, enter the matrix first, then the  
operator, then the scalar. For multiplication, the order of  
the operands does not matter.  
The matrix and the scalar can be real or complex. For  
example, to divide the result of the previous example by  
2, press the following keys:  
2
To multiply two  
matrices  
To multiply the two matrices M1 and M2 that you created  
for the previous example, press the following keys:  
M1  
M
2
To multiply a matrix by a  
vector, enter the matrix  
first, then the vector. The  
number of elements in the vector must equal the number  
of columns in the matrix.  
To raise a matrix to  
a power  
You can raise a matrix to any power as long as the power  
is an integer. The following example shows the result of  
raising matrix M1, created earlier, to the power of 5.  
M1  
5
Note: You can also raise a  
matrix to a power without  
first storing it as a variable.  
Matrices can be raised to negative powers. In this case,  
the result is equivalent to 1/[matrix]^ABS(power). In the  
following example, M1 is raised to the power of –2.  
Matrices  
15-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
M1  
2
To divide by a  
square matrix  
For division of a matrix or a vector by a square matrix,  
the number of rows of the dividend (or the number of  
elements, if it is a vector) must equal the number of rows  
in the divisor.  
This operation is not a mathematical division: it is a left-  
multiplication by the inverse of the divisor. M1/M2 is  
–1  
equivalent to M2 * M1.  
To divide the two matrices M1 and M2 that you created  
for the previous example, press the following keys:  
M1  
M2  
To invert a matrix  
You can invert a square matrix in HOME by typing the  
–1  
matrix (or its variable name) and pressing  
x
. Or you can use the matrix INVERSE command.  
Enter INVERSE(matrixname) in HOME and press  
.
To negate each  
element  
You can change the sign of each element in a matrix by  
pressing  
before the matrix name.  
Solving systems of linear equations  
Example  
Solve the following linear system:  
2x + 3y + 4z = 5  
x + y z = 7  
4x y + 2z = 1  
1. Open the Matrix  
catalog and create a  
vector.  
MATRIX  
15-8  
Matrices  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2. Create the vector of the  
constants in the linear  
system.  
5
1
7
3. Return to the Matrix  
Catalog.  
MATRIX  
In this example, the  
vector you created is  
listed as M1.  
4. Create a new matrix.  
Select Real matrix  
5. Enter the equation  
coefficients.  
2
4
1
3
1
1
1
4
2
In this example, the matrix you created is listed as  
M2.  
6. Return to HOME and enter the calculation to  
left-multiply the constants vector by the inverse of the  
coefficients matrix.  
M2  
–1  
x
M1  
The result is a vector of the  
solutions x = 2, y = 3 and z = –2.  
An alternative method, is to use the RREF function. See  
“RREF” on page 15-12.  
Matrices  
15-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Matrix functions and commands  
About functions  
Functions can be used in any aplet or in HOME. They  
are listed in the MATH menu under the Matrix  
category. They can be used in mathematical  
expressions—primarily in HOME—as well as in  
programs.  
Functions always produce and display a result. They  
do not change any stored variables, such as a matrix  
variable.  
Functions have arguments that are enclosed in  
parentheses and separated by commas; for example,  
CROSS(vector1,vector2). The matrix input can be  
either a matrix variable name (such as M1) or the  
actual matrix data inside brackets. For example,  
CROSS(M1,[1,2]).  
About commands  
Matrix commands are listed in the CMDS menu (  
CMDS), in the matrix category.  
See “Matrix commands” on page 18-24 for details of the  
matrix commands available for use in programming.  
Functions differ from commands in that a function can be  
used in an expression. Commands cannot be used in an  
expression.  
Argument conventions  
For row# or column#, supply the number of the row  
(counting from the top, starting with 1) or the number  
of the column (counting from the left, starting with 1).  
The argument matrix can refer to either a vector or a  
matrix.  
Matrix functions  
COLNORM  
Column Norm. Finds the maximum value (over all  
columns) of the sums of the absolute values of all elements  
in a column.  
COLNORM(matrix)  
15-10  
Matrices  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
COND  
Condition Number. Finds the 1-norm (column norm) of a  
square matrix.  
COND(matrix)  
CROSS  
DET  
Cross Product of vector1 with vector2.  
CROSS(vector1, vector2)  
Determinant of a square matrix.  
DET(matrix)  
DOT  
Dot Product of two arrays, matrix1 matrix2.  
DOT(matrix1, matrix2)  
EIGENVAL  
EIGENVV  
Displays the eigenvalues in vector form for matrix.  
EIGENVAL(matrix)  
Eigenvectors and Eigenvalues for a square matrix.  
Displays a list of two arrays. The first contains the  
eigenvectors and the second contains the eigenvalues.  
EIGENVV(matrix)  
IDENMAT  
Identity matrix. Creates a square matrix of dimension  
size × size whose diagonal elements are 1 and off-  
diagonal elements are zero.  
IDENMAT(size)  
INVERSE  
LQ  
Inverts a square matrix (real or complex).  
INVERSE(matrix)  
LQ Factorization. Factors an m × n matrix into three  
matrices:  
{[[ m × n lowertrapezoidal]],[[ n × n orthogonal]],  
[[ m × m permutation]]}.  
LQ(matrix)  
LSQ  
Least Squares. Displays the minimum norm least squares  
matrix (or vector).  
LSQ(matrix1, matrix2)  
Matrices  
15-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                 
LU  
LU Decomposition. Factors a square matrix into three  
matrices:  
{[[lowertriangular]],[[uppertriangular]],[[permutation]]}  
The uppertriangular has ones on its diagonal.  
LU(matrix)  
MAKEMAT  
Make Matrix. Creates a matrix of dimension rows ×  
columns, using expression to calculate each element. If  
expression contains the variables I and J, then the  
calculation for each element substitutes the current row  
number for I and the current column number for J.  
MAKEMAT(expression, rows, columns)  
Example  
MAKEMAT(0,3,3)returns a 3×3 zero matrix,  
[[0,0,0],[0,0,0],[0,0,0]].  
QR  
QR Factorization. Factors an m×n matrix into three  
matrices: {[[m×m orthogonal]],[[m×n  
uppertrapezoidal]],[[n×n permutation]]}.  
QR(matrix)  
RANK  
Rank of a rectangular matrix.  
RANK(matrix)  
ROWNORM  
Row Norm. Finds the maximum value (over all rows) for  
the sums of the absolute values of all elements in a row.  
ROWNORM(matrix)  
RREF  
Reduced-Row Echelon Form. Changes a rectangular  
matrix to its reduced row-echelon form.  
RREF(matrix)  
SCHUR  
Schur Decomposition. Factors a square matrix into two  
matrices. If matrix is real, then the result is  
{[[orthogonal]],[[upper-quasi triangular]]}.  
If matrix is complex, then the result is  
{[[unitary]],[[upper-triangular]]}.  
SCHUR(matrix)  
SIZE  
Dimensions of matrix. Returned as a list: {rows,columns}.  
SIZE(matrix)  
15-12  
Matrices  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
SPECNORM  
SPECRAD  
SVD  
Spectral Norm of matrix.  
SPECNORM(matrix)  
Spectral Radius of a square matrix.  
SPECRAD(matrix)  
Singular Value Decomposition. Factors an m × n matrix  
into two matrices and a vector:  
{[[m × m square orthogonal]],[[n × n square orthogonal]],  
[real]}.  
SVD(matrix)  
SVL  
Singular Values. Returns a vector containing the singular  
values of matrix.  
SVL(matrix)  
TRACE  
Finds the trace of a square matrix. The trace is equal to  
the sum of the diagonal elements. (It is also equal to the  
sum of the eigenvalues.)  
TRACE(matrix)  
TRN  
Transposes matrix. For a complex matrix, TRN finds the  
conjugate transpose.  
TRN(matrix)  
Examples  
Identity Matrix  
You can create an identity matrix with the IDENMAT  
function. For example, IDENMAT(2) creates the 2×2  
identity matrix [[1,0],[0,1]].  
You can also create an identity matrix using the  
MAKEMAT (make matrix) function. For example, entering  
MAKEMAT(I¼J,4,4) creates a 4 × 4 matrix showing the  
numeral 1 for all elements except zeros on the diagonal.  
The logical operator ¼ returns 0 when I (the row number)  
and J (the column number) are equal, and returns 1 when  
they are not equal.  
Matrices  
15-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Transposing a  
Matrix  
The TRN function swaps the row-column and column-row  
elements of a matrix. For instance, element 1,2 (row 1,  
column 2) is swapped with element 2,1; element 2,3 is  
swapped with element 3,2; and so on.  
For example, TRN([[1,2],[3,4]])creates the matrix  
[[1,3],[2,4]].  
Reduced-Row  
Echelon Form  
The following set of equations x – 2y + 3z = 14  
2x + y z = – 3  
4x – 2y + 2z = 14  
can be written as the augmented matrix  
1 –2 3 14  
2 1 –1 –3  
4 –2 2 14  
which can then stored as a  
3 × 4 real matrix in any  
matrix variable. M1 is used  
in this example.  
You can use the RREF  
function to change this to  
reduced row echelon form,  
storing it in any matrix  
variable. M2 is used in this  
example.  
The reduced row echelon  
matrix gives the solution to  
the linear equation in the  
fourth column.  
An advantage of using the  
RREF function is that it will also work with inconsistent  
matrices resulting from systems of equations which have  
no solution or infinite solutions.  
For example, the following set of equations has an infinite  
number of solutions:  
x + y z = 5  
2x y = 7  
x – 2y + z = 2  
15-14  
Matrices  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The final row of zeros in the  
reduced-row echelon form  
of the augmented matrix  
indicates an inconsistent  
system with infinite  
solutions.  
Matrices  
15-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16  
Lists  
You can do list operations in HOME and in programs. A  
list consists of comma-separated real or complex  
numbers, expressions, or matrices, all enclosed in braces.  
A list may, for example, contain a sequence of real  
numbers such as {1,2,3}. (If the Decimal Mark mode is  
set to Comma, then the separators are periods.) Lists  
represent a convenient way to group related objects.  
There are ten list variables available, named L0 to L9. You  
can use them in calculations or expressions in HOME or  
in a program. Retrieve the list names from the VARS  
menu, or just type their names from the keyboard.  
You can create, edit, delete, send, and receive named  
lists in the List catalog (  
LIST). You can also create  
and store lists—named or unnnamed—in HOME lists  
List variables are identical in behaviour to the columns  
C1.C0 in the Statistics aplet. You can store a statistics  
column to a list (or vice versa) and use any of the list  
functions on the statistics columns, or the statistics  
functions, on the list variables.  
Create a list in  
the List Catalog  
1. Open the List catalog.  
LIST.  
2. Highlight the list name  
you want to assign to  
the new list (L1, etc.)  
and press  
to  
display the List editor.  
Lists  
16-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3. Enter the values you want in the list, pressing  
after each one.  
Values can be real or  
complex numbers (or  
an expression). If you  
enter a calculation, it is  
evaluated and the  
result is inserted in the  
list.  
4. When done, press  
LIST to see the List catalog,  
or press  
to return to HOME.  
List catalog keys  
The list catalog keys are:  
Key  
Meaning  
Opens the highlighted list for  
editing.  
Transmits the highlighted list to  
another hp 39gs or a PC. See  
“Sending and receiving aplets” on  
page 19-4 for further information.  
Receives a list from another  
hp 39gs or a PC. See “Sending and  
receiving aplets” on page 19-4 for  
further information.  
Clears the highlighted list.  
Clears all lists.  
CLEAR  
or Moves to the end or the beginning  
of the catalog.  
16-2  
Lists  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
List edit keys  
When you press  
to create or change a list, the  
following keys are available to you:  
Key  
Meaning  
Copies the highlighted list item into  
the edit line.  
Inserts a new value before the  
highlighted item.  
Deletes the highlighted item from  
the list.  
CLEAR  
Clears all elements from the list.  
or Moves to the end or the beginning  
of the list.  
Create a list in  
HOME  
1. Enter the list on the edit line. Start and end the list  
with braces (the shifted and keys) and  
separate each element with a comma.  
2. Press  
to evaluate and display the list.  
Immediately after typing in the list, you can store it in  
a variable by pressing  
listname  
. The  
list variable names are L0 through L9.  
This example stores the  
list {25,147,8} in L1.  
Note: You can omit the  
final brace when  
entering a list.  
Lists  
16-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Displaying and editing lists  
To display a list  
In the List catalog, highlight the list name and press  
.
In HOME, enter the name of the list and press  
.
To display one  
element  
In HOME, enter listname(element#). For example, if L2 is  
{3,4,5,6}, then L2(2)  
returns 4.  
To edit a list  
1. Open the List catalog.  
LIST.  
2. Press  
or  
to highlight the name of the list you  
want to edit (L1, etc.) and press  
list contents.  
to display the  
3. Press  
or  
to highlight the element you want to  
edit. In this example, edit the third element so that it  
has a value of 5.  
5
4. Press  
.
16-4  
Lists  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
To insertan element  
in a list  
1. Open the List catalog.  
LIST.  
2. Press  
or  
to  
highlight the name of  
the list you want to edit  
(L1, etc.) and press  
to display the list  
contents.  
New elements are inserted above the highlighted  
position. In this example, an element, with the value  
of 9, is inserted between the first and second  
elements in the list.  
3. Press  
to the  
insertion position, then  
press  
, and press  
9.  
4. Press  
.
To store one  
element  
In HOME, enter value  
example, to store 148 as the second element in L1, type  
148 L1(2)  
listname(element). For  
.
Lists  
16-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Deleting lists  
To delete a list  
In the List catalog, highlight the list name and press  
.
You are prompted to confirm that you want to delete the  
contents of the highlighted list variable. Press  
delete the contents.  
to  
To delete all lists  
In the List catalog, press  
CLEAR.  
Transmitting lists  
You can send lists to calculators or PCs just as you can  
aplets, programs, matrices, and notes.  
1. Align the HP 39gs calculators’ infrared ports (or  
connect the calculators using an appropriate cable).  
2. Open the List catalogs on both calculators.  
3. Highlight the list to send.  
4. Press  
and choose the method of sending  
(infrared or cable).  
5. Press  
on the receiving calculator and choose  
the method of receiving (infrared or cable).  
For more information on sending and receiving files, see  
“Sending and receiving aplets” on page 19-4.  
List functions  
List functions are found in the MATH menu. You can use  
them in HOME, as well as in programs.  
You can type in the name  
of the function, or you can  
copy the name of the  
function from the List  
category of the MATH  
menu. Press  
(the  
alpha L character key). This  
highlights the List category in the left column. Press  
to  
move the cursor to the right column which contain the List  
functions, select a function, and press  
.
List functions have the following syntax:  
Functions have arguments that are enclosed in  
parentheses and separated by commas. Example:  
16-6  
Lists  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
CONCAT(L1,L2). An argument can be either a list  
variable name (such as L1) or the actual list. For  
example, REVERSE({1,2,3}).  
If Decimal Mark in Modes is set to Comma, use  
periods to separate arguments. For example,  
CONCAT(L1.L2).  
Common operators like +, –, ×, and / can take lists as  
arguments. If there are two arguments and both are lists,  
then the lists must have the same length, since the  
calculation pairs the elements. If there are two arguments  
and one is a real number, then the calculation pairs the  
number with each element of the list.  
Example  
5*{1,2,3} returns {5,10,15}.  
Besides the common operators that can take numbers,  
matrices, or lists as arguments, there are commands that  
can only operate on lists.  
CONCAT  
ΔLIST  
Concatenates two lists into a new list.  
CONCAT(list1,list2)  
Example  
CONCAT({1,2,3},{4})returns {1,2,3,4}.  
Creates a new list composed of the first differences, that  
is, the differences between the sequential elements in  
list1. The new list has one fewer elements than list1. The  
first differences for {x x ... x } are {x –x ... x –x }.  
1
2
n
2
1
n
n–1  
ΔLIST(list1)  
Lists  
16-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Example  
In HOME, store {3,5,8,12,17,23} in L5 and find the first  
differences for the list.  
{3,5,8,12,17,23  
}
L 5  
L
Select ΔLIST  
L5  
MAKELIST  
Calculates a sequence of elements for a new list.  
Evaluates expression with variable from begin to end  
values, taken at increment steps.  
MAKELIST(expression,variable,begin,end,  
increment)  
The MAKELIST function generates a series by  
automatically producing a list from the repeated  
evaluation of an expression.  
Example  
In HOME, generate a series of squares from 23 to 27.  
L
Select  
MAKELIST  
A
A
23  
27  
1
ΠLIST  
Calculates the product of all elements in list.  
ΠLIST(list)  
Example  
ΠLIST({2,3,4})returns 24.  
POS  
Returns the position of an element within a list. The  
element can be a value, a variable, or an expression. If  
there is more than one instance of the element, the  
16-8  
Lists  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
position of the first occurrence is returned. A value of 0 is  
returned if there is no occurrence of the specified element.  
POS(list, element)  
Example  
POS ({3, 7, 12, 19},12)returns 3  
REVERSE  
SIZE  
Creates a list by reversing the order of the elements in a  
list.  
REVERSE(list)  
Calculates the number of elements in a list.  
SIZE(list)  
Also works with matrices.  
ΣLIST  
Calculates the sum of all elements in list.  
ΣLIST(list)  
Example  
ΣLIST({2,3,4})returns 9.  
SORT  
Sorts elements in ascending order.  
SORT(list)  
Finding statistical values for list elements  
To find values such as the mean, median, maximum, and  
minimum values of the elements in a list, use the Statistics  
aplet.  
Example  
In this example, use the Statistics aplet to find the mean,  
median, maximum, and minimum values of the elements  
in the list, L1.  
1. Create L1 with values 88, 90, 89, 65, 70, and 89.  
{ 88  
65  
}
90  
70  
89  
89  
L1  
Lists  
16-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2. In HOME, store L1 into  
C1. You will then be  
able to see the list data in the Numeric view of the  
Statistics aplet.  
L1  
C1  
3. Start the Statistics aplet, and select 1-variable mode  
(press  
, if necessary, to display  
).  
Select  
Statistics  
Note: Your list values are now in column 1 (C1).  
4. In the Symbolic view, define H1 (for example) as C1  
(sample) and 1 (frequency).  
5. Go to the Numeric view to display calculated  
statistics.  
See “One-variable” on page 10-14 for the meaning  
of each computed statistic.  
16-10  
Lists  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17  
Notes and sketches  
Introduction  
The HP 39gs has text and picture editors for entering  
notes and sketches.  
Each aplet has its own independent Note view and  
Sketch view. Notes and sketches that you create in  
these views are associated with the aplet. When you  
save the aplet, or send it to another calculator, the  
notes and sketches are saved or sent as well.  
The Notepad is a collection of notes independent of  
all aplets. These notes can also be sent to another  
calculator via the Notepad Catalog.  
Aplet note view  
You can attach text to an aplet in its Note view.  
To write a note in  
Note view  
1. In an aplet, press NOTE for the Note view.  
2. Use the note editing keys shown in the table in the  
following section.  
3. Set Alpha lock (  
) for quick entry of letters. For  
lowercase Alpha lock, press  
.
4. While Alpha lock is on:  
To type a single letter of the opposite case, press  
letter.  
To type a single non-alpha character (such as 5  
or [ ), press  
first. (This turns off Alpha  
lock for one character.)  
Your work is automatically saved. Press any view key  
) or to exit  
(
,
,
,
the Notes view.  
Notes and sketches  
17-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Note edit keys  
Key  
Meaning  
Space key for text entry.  
Displays next page of a multi-page  
note.  
Alpha-lock for letter entry.  
Lower-case alpha-lock for letter  
entry.  
Backspaces cursor and deletes  
character.  
Deletes current character.  
Starts a new line.  
CLEAR  
Erases the entire note.  
Menu for entering variable names,  
and contents of variables.  
Menu for entering math  
operations, and constants.  
Menu for entering program  
commands.  
CMDS  
Displays special characters. To  
type one, highlight it and press  
. To copy a character without  
closing the CHARS screen, press  
.
CHARS  
17-2  
Notes and sketches  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Aplet sketch view  
You can attach pictures to an aplet in its Sketch view  
SKETCH). Your work is automatically saved with the  
(
aplet. Press any other view key or  
Sketch view  
to exit the  
Sketch keys  
Key  
Meaning  
Stores the specified portion of the  
current sketch to a graphics  
variable (G1 through G0).  
Adds a new, blank page to the  
current sketch set.  
Displays next sketch in the sketch  
set. Animates if held down.  
Opens the edit line to type a text  
label.  
Displays the menu-key labels for  
drawing.  
Deletes the current sketch.  
Erases the entire sketch set.  
CLEAR  
Toggles menu key labels on and  
off. If menu key labels are hidden,  
or any menu key, redisplays  
the menu key labels.  
To draw a line  
1. In an aplet, press  
2. In Sketch view, press  
where you want to start the line  
3. Press . This turns on line-drawing.  
4. Move the cursor in any direction to the end point of  
the line by pressing the keys.  
5. Press to finish the line.  
SKETCH for the Sketch view.  
and move the cursor to  
,
,
,
Notes and sketches  
17-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
To draw a box  
1. In Sketch view, press  
and move the cursor to  
where you want any corner of the box to be.  
2. Press  
.
3. Move the cursor to mark the opposite corner for the  
box. You can adjust the size of the box by moving the  
cursor.  
4. Press  
to finish the box.  
To draw a circle  
DRAW keys  
1. In Sketch view, press  
and move the cursor to  
where you want the center of the circle to be.  
2. Press  
. This turns on circle drawing.  
3. Move the cursor the distance of the radius.  
4. Press  
to draw the circle.  
Key  
Meaning  
Dot on. Turns pixels on as the cursor  
moves.  
Dot off. Turns pixels off as the cursor  
moves.  
Draws a line from the cursor’s starting  
position to the cursor’s current position.  
Press  
when you have finished. You  
can draw a line at any angle.  
Draws a box from the cursor’s starting  
position to the cursor’s current position.  
Press  
when you have finished.  
Draws a circle with the cursor’s starting  
position as the center. The radius is the  
distance between the cursor’s starting  
and ending position. Press  
the circle.  
to draw  
17-4  
Notes and sketches  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
To label parts of a  
sketch  
1. Press  
the Alpha shift on, press  
(for lowercase).  
To make the label a smaller character size, turn off  
before pressing . ( is a toggle  
and type the text on the edit line. To lock  
(for uppercase) or  
between small and large font size). The smaller  
character size cannot display lowercase letters.  
2. Press  
.
3. Position the label where you want it by pressing the  
,
4. Press  
5. Press  
,
,
keys.  
again to affix the label.  
to continue  
drawing, or press  
to exit the  
Sketch view.  
To create a set of  
sketches  
You can create a set of up to ten sketches. This allows for  
simple animation.  
After making a sketch, press  
to add a new,  
blank page. You can now make a new sketch, which  
becomes part of the current set of sketches.  
To view the next sketch in an existing set, press  
. Hold  
down for animation.  
To remove the current page in the current sketch  
series, press  
.
To store into a  
graphics variable  
You can define a portion of a sketch inside a box, and  
then store that graphic into a graphics variable.  
1. In the Sketch view, display the sketch you want to  
copy (store into a variable).  
2. Press  
3. Highlight the variable name you want to use and  
press  
4. Draw a box around the portion you want to copy:  
move the cursor to one corner, press , then move  
the cursor to the opposite corner, and press  
.
.
.
Notes and sketches  
17-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
To import a  
graphics variable  
You can copy the contents of a graphics variable into the  
Sketch view of an aplet.  
1. Open the Sketch view of the aplet (  
The graphic will be copied here.  
SKETCH).  
2. Press  
,
.
3. Highlight Graphic, then press  
name of the variable (G1, etc.).  
and highlight the  
4. Press  
variable.  
to recall the contents of the graphics  
5. Move the box to where you would like to copy the  
graphic, then press  
The notepad  
Subject to available memory, you can store as many  
notes as you want in the Notepad (  
NOTEPAD).  
These notes are independent of any aplet. The Notepad  
catalog lists the existing entries by name. It does not  
include notes that were created in aplets’ Note views, but  
these can be imported. See “To import a note” on  
page 17-8.  
To create a note in  
the Notepad  
1. Display the Notepad  
catalog.  
NOTEPAD  
2. Create a new note.  
3. Enter a name for your  
note.  
MYNOTE  
17-6  
Notes and sketches  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. Write your note.  
See “Note edit keys”  
on page 17-2 for more  
information on the  
entry and editing of  
notes.  
5. When you are finished, press  
or an aplet key  
to exit Notepad. Your work is automatically saved.  
Notepad Catalog keys  
Key  
Meaning  
Opens the selected note for  
editing.  
Begins a new note, and asks  
for a name.  
Transmits the selected note to  
another HP 39gs or PC.  
Receives a note being  
transmitted from another HP  
39gs or PC.  
Deletes the selected note.  
CLEAR  
Deletes all notes in the  
catalog.  
Notes and sketches  
17-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To import a note  
You can import a note from the Notepad into an aplet’s  
Note view, and vice versa. Suppose you want to copy a  
note named “Assignments” from the Notepad into the  
Function Note view:  
1. In the Function aplet, display the Note view  
(
NOTE).  
2. Press  
, highlight Notepadin the left  
column, then highlight the name Assignments” in the  
right column.  
3. Press  
to copy the contents of  
Assignments” to the Function Note view.  
Note: To recall the name instead of the contents,  
press  
instead of  
.
Suppose you want to copy the Note view from the current  
aplet into the note, Assignments, in the Notepad.  
1. In the Notepad (  
Assignments.  
NOTEPAD), open the note,  
2. Press  
, highlight Notein the left  
and highlight NoteTextin  
column, then press  
the right column.  
3. Press  
to recall the contents of the Note  
view into the note Assignments.  
17-8  
Notes and sketches  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
18  
Programming  
Introduction  
This chapter describes how to program using the hp  
39gs. In this chapter you’ll learn about:  
using the Program catalog to create and edit  
programs  
programming commands  
storing and retrieving variables in programs  
programming variables.  
H I N T  
More information on programming, including examples  
and special tools, can be found at HP’s calculators web  
site:  
http://www.hp.com/calculators  
The Contents of a  
Program  
An HP 39gs program contains a sequence of numbers,  
mathematical expressions, and commands that execute  
automatically to perform a task.  
These items are separated by a colon ( : ). Commands  
that take multiple arguments have those arguments  
separated by a semicolon ( ; ). For example,  
PIXON xposition;yposition:  
Structured  
Programming  
Inside a program you can use branching structures to  
control the execution flow. You can take advantage of  
structured programming by creating building-block  
programs. Each building-block program stands  
alone—and it can be called from other programs. Note:  
If a program has a space in its name then you have to put  
quotes around it when you want to run it.  
Programming  
18-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Example  
RUN GETVALUE: RUN CALCULATE: RUN  
"SHOW ANSWER":  
This program is separated into three main tasks, each an  
individual program. Within each program, the task can  
be simple—or it can be divided further into other  
programs that perform smaller tasks.  
Program catalog  
The Program catalog is where you create, edit, delete,  
send, receive, or run programs. This section describes  
how to  
open the Program catalog  
create a new program  
enter commands from the program commands menu  
enter functions from the MATH menu  
edit a program  
run and debug a program  
stop a program  
copy a program  
send and receive a program  
delete a program or its contents  
customize an aplet.  
Open Program  
Catalog  
1. Press  
PROGRM.  
The Program Catalog displays a list of program  
names. The Program Catalog contains a built-in entry  
called Editline.  
Editlinecontains the last expression that you  
entered from the edit line in HOME, or the last data  
you entered in an input form. (If you press  
from HOME without entering any data, the HP 39gs  
runs the contents of Editline.)  
Before starting to work with programs, you should  
take a few minutes to become familiar with the  
Program catalog menu keys. You can use any of the  
following keys (both menu and keyboard), to perform  
tasks in the Program catalog.  
18-2  
Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Program catalog keys  
The program catalog keys are:  
Key  
Meaning  
Opens the highlighted program  
for editing.  
Prompts for a new program  
name, then opens an empty  
program.  
Transmits the highlighted  
program to another HP 39gs or to  
a disk drive.  
Receives the highlighted program  
from another HP 39gs or from a  
disk drive.  
Runs the highlighted program.  
or  
Moves to the beginning or end of  
the Program catalog.  
Deletes the highlighted program.  
CLEAR  
Deletes all programs in the  
program catalog.  
Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18-3  
Creating and editing programs  
Create a new  
program  
1. Press  
2. Press  
PROGRM to open the Program catalog.  
.
The HP 39gs prompts  
you for a name.  
A program name can contain special characters,  
such as a space. However, if you use special  
characters and then run the program by typing it in  
HOME, you must enclose the program name in  
double quotes (" "). Don't use the " symbol within your  
program name.  
3. Type your program  
name, then press  
.
When you press  
the Program Editor  
opens.  
,
4. Enter your program. When done, start any other  
activity. Your work is saved automatically.  
Entercommands  
Until you become familiar with the HP 39gs commands,  
the easiest way to enter commands is to select them from  
the Commands menu from the Program editor. You can  
also type in commands using alpha characters.  
1. From the Program editor, press  
the Program Commands menu.  
CMDS to open  
CMDS  
18-4  
Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2. On the left, use  
category, then press  
or  
to highlight a command  
to access the commands in  
the category. Select the command that you want.  
3. Press  
to paste the command into the program  
editor.  
Edit a program  
1. Press  
PROGRM to  
open the Program  
catalog.  
2. Use the arrow keys to highlight the program you want  
to edit, and press . The HP 39gs opens the  
Program Editor. The name of your program appears  
in the title bar of the display. You can use the  
following keys to edit your program.  
Programming  
18-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Editing keys  
The editing keys are:  
Key Meaning  
Inserts the  
editing point.  
character at the  
Inserts space into text.  
Displays previous page of the  
program.  
Displays next page of the program.  
Moves up or down one line.  
Moves right or left one character.  
Alpha-lock for letter entry. Press  
A...Z to lock lower case.  
Backspaces cursor and deletes  
character.  
Deletes current character.  
Starts a new line.  
CLEAR  
Erases the entire program.  
Displays menus for selecting variable  
names, contents of variables, math  
functions, and program constants.  
CMDS  
Displays menus for selecting program  
conmmands.  
CHARS  
Displays all characters. To type one,  
highlight it and press  
.
To enter several characters in a row,  
use the  
CHARS menu.  
menu key while in the  
18-6  
Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using programs  
Run a program  
From HOME, type RUN program_name.  
or  
From the Program catalog, highlight the program you  
want to run and press  
Regardless of where you start the program, all programs  
run in HOME. What you see will differ slightly depending  
on where you started the program. If you start the  
program from HOME, the HP 39gs displays the contents  
of Ans (Home variable containing the last result), when  
the program has finished. If you start the program from  
the Program catalog, the hp39gs returns you to the  
Program catalog when the program ends.  
Debug a  
program  
If you run a program that contains errors, the program  
will stop and you will see an error message.  
To debug the program:  
1. Press  
to edit the program.  
The insert cursor appears in the program at the point  
where the error occurred.  
2. Edit the program to fix the error.  
3. Run the program.  
4. Repeat the process until you correct all errors.  
Stop a program  
You can stop the running of a program at any time by  
pressing CANCEL (the  
key). Note: You may have to  
press it a couple of times.  
Programming  
18-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Copy a program You can use the following procedure if you want to make  
a copy of your work before editing—or if you want to use  
one program as a template for another.  
1. Press  
2. Press  
PROGRM to open the Program catalog.  
.
3. Type a new file name, then choose  
.
The Program Editor opens with a new program.  
4. Press  
to open the variables menu.  
to quickly scroll to Program.  
5. Press  
6. Press  
copy.  
, then highlight the program you want to  
7. Press  
, then press  
.
The contents of the highlighted program are copied  
into the current program at the cursor location.  
H I N T  
If you use a programming routine often, save the routine  
under a different program name, then use the above  
method to copy it into your programs.  
Transmit a  
program  
You can send programs to, and receive programs from,  
other calculators just as you can send and receive aplets,  
matrices, lists, and notes.  
After aligning the calculators’ infrared ports, open the  
Program catalogs on both calculators. Highlight the  
program to send, then press  
on the sending  
calculator and on the receiving calculator.  
You can also send programs to, and receive programs  
from, a remote storage device (aplet disk drive or  
computer). This takes place via a cable connection and  
requires an aplet disk drive or specialized software  
running on a PC (such as a connectivity kit).  
18-8  
Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Delete a  
program  
To delete a program:  
1. Press  
PROGRM to open the Program catalog.  
2. Highlight a program to delete, then press  
.
Delete all  
programs  
You can delete all programs at once.  
1. In the Program catalog, press  
2. Press  
CLEAR.  
.
Delete the  
contents of a  
program  
You can clear the contents of a program without deleting  
the program name.  
1. Press  
2. Highlight a program, then press  
3. Press CLEAR, then press  
PROGRM to open the Program catalog.  
.
.
4. The contents of the program are deleted, but the  
program name remains.  
Customizing an aplet  
You can customize an aplet and develop a set of  
programs to work with the aplet.  
Use the SETVIEWS command to create a custom VIEWS  
menu which links specially written programs to the new  
aplet.  
A useful method for customizing an aplet is illustrated  
below:  
1. Decide on the built-in aplet that you want to  
customize. For example you could customize the  
Function aplet or the Statistics aplet. The customized  
aplet inherits all the properties of the built-in aplet.  
Save the customized aplet with a unique name.  
2. Customize the new aplet if you need to, for example  
by presetting axes or angle measures.  
3. Develop the programs to work with your customized  
aplet. When you develop the aplet’s programs, use  
the standard aplet naming convention. This allows  
you to keep track of the programs in the Program  
catalog that belong to each aplet. See Aplet naming  
convention” on page 18-10.  
Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18-9  
     
4. Develop a program that uses the SETVIEWS  
command to modify the aplet’s VIEWS menu. The  
menu options provide links to associated programs.  
You can specify any other programs that you want  
transferred with the aplet. See “SETVIEWS” on page  
18-14 for information on the command.  
5. Ensure that the customized aplet is selected, then run  
the menu configuration program to configure the  
aplet’s VIEWS menu.  
6. Test the customized aplet and debug the associated  
programs. (Refer to “Debug a program” on page  
16-7).  
Aplet naming convention  
To assist users in keeping track of aplets and associated  
programs, use the following naming convention when  
setting up an aplet’s programs:  
Start all program names with an abbreviation of the  
aplet name. We will use APL in this example.  
Name programs called by menu entries in the VIEWS  
menu number, after the entry, for example:  
APL.ME1 for the program called by menu option  
1
APL.ME2 for the program called by menu option  
2
Name the program that configures the new VIEWS  
menu option APL.SV where SV stands for SETVIEWS.  
For example, a customized aplet called “Differentiation”  
might call programs called DIFF.ME1, DIFF.ME2, and  
DIFF.SV.  
Example  
This example aplet is designed to demonstrate the  
process of customizing an aplet. The new aplet is based  
on the Function aplet. Note: This aplet is not intended to  
serve a serious use, merely to illustrate the process.  
18-10  
Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Save the aplet  
1. Open the Function aplet and save it as  
“EXPERIMENT. The new aplet appears in the Aplet  
library.  
Select  
Function  
EXPERIMENT  
2. Create a program  
called EXP.ME1 with  
contents as shown. This  
program configures the  
plot ranges, then runs a  
program that allows  
you to set the angle format.  
3. Create a program  
called EXP.ME2 with  
contents as shown. This  
program sets the  
numeric view options  
for the aplet, and runs  
the program that you can use to configure the angle  
mode.  
4. Create a program  
called EXP.ANG which  
the previous two  
programs call.  
5. Create a program  
called EXP.S which runs  
when you start the  
aplet, as shown. This  
program sets the angle  
mode to degrees, and  
sets up the initial function that the aplet plots.  
Configuring the  
Setviews menu  
option  
In this section we will begin by configuring the  
VIEWS menu by using the SETVIEWS command. We  
will then create the “helper” programs called by the  
VIEWS menu which will do the actual work.  
programs  
Programming  
18-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Open the Program catalog and create a program  
named “EXP.SV. Include the following code in the  
program.  
Each entry line after the command SETVIEWS is a trio  
that consists of a VIEWS menu text line (a space  
indicates none), a program name, and a number that  
defines the view to go to after the program has run its  
aplet when the aplet is transferred.  
SETVIEWS ;;18;  
Sets the first menu option to be Auto  
scale. This is the fourth standard Function  
aplet view menu option and the 18 Auto  
scale, specifies that it is to be included in  
the new menu. The empty quotes will  
ensure that the old name of Auto scale”  
appears on the new menu. See  
“SETVIEWS” on page 18-14.  
My Entry1;EXP.ME1;1;  
Sets the second menu option. This option  
runs program EXP.ME1, then returns to  
view 1, Plot view.  
My Entry2;EXP.ME2;3;  
Sets the third menu option. This option  
runs the program EXP.ME2, then returns to  
view 3, the NUM view.  
;EXP.SV;0;  
This line specifies that the program to set  
the View menu (this program) is  
transferred with the aplet. The space  
character between the first set of quotes in  
the trio specifies that no menu option  
appears for the entry. You do not need to  
transfer this program with the aplet, but it  
allows users to modify the aplet’s menu if  
they want to.  
18-12  
Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
;EXP.ANG;0;  
The program EXP.ANG is a small routine  
that is called by other programs that the  
aplet uses. This entry specifies that the  
program EXP.ANGis transferred when the  
aplet is transferred, but the space in the  
first quotes ensures that no entry appears  
on the menu.  
’’Start;EXP.S;7:  
This specifies the Start menu option. The  
program that is associated with this entry,  
EXP.S, runs automatically when you  
start the aplet. Because this menu option  
specifies view 7, the VIEWS menu opens  
when you start the aplet.  
You only need to run this program once to configure  
your aplet’s VIEWS menu. Once the aplet’s VIEWS  
menu is configured, it remains that way until you run  
SETVIEWS again.  
You do not need to include this program for your  
aplet to work, but it is useful to specify that the  
program is attached to the aplet, and transmitted  
when the aplet is transmitted.  
7. Return to the program  
catalog. The programs  
that you created should  
appear as follows:  
8. You must now  
the  
program EXP.SV to execute the SETVIEWS command  
and create the modified VIEWS menu. Check that the  
name of the new aplet is highlighted in the Aplet  
view.  
9. You can now return to the Aplet library and press  
to run your new aplet.  
Programming commands  
This section describes the commands for programming  
with hp 39GS. You can enter these commands in your  
program by typing them or by accessing them from the  
Commands menu.  
Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18-13  
 
Aplet commands  
CHECK  
Checks (selects) the corresponding function in the current  
aplet. For example, Check 3 would check F3 if the current  
aplet is Function. Then a checkmark would appear next  
and evaluated in Numeric view.  
CHECKn:  
SELECT  
Selects the named aplet and makes it the current aplet.  
Note: Quotes are needed if the name contains spaces or  
other special characters.  
SELECTapletname:  
SETVIEWS  
The SETVIEWS command is used to define entries in the  
VIEWS menu for aplets that you customize. See  
“Customizing an aplet” on page 18-9 for an example of  
using the SETVIEWS command.  
When you use the SETVIEWS command, the aplet’s  
standard VIEWS menu is deleted and the customized  
menu is used in its place. You only need to apply the  
command to an aplet once. The VIEWS menu changes  
remain unless you apply the command again.  
Typically, you develop a program that uses the  
SETVIEWS command only. The command contains a trio  
of arguments for each menu option to create, or program  
to attach. Keep the following points in mind when using  
this command:  
The SETVIEWS command deletes an aplet’s standard  
Views menu options. If you want to use any of the  
standard options on your reconfigured VIEWS menu,  
you must include them in the configuration.  
When you invoke the SETVIEWS command, the  
changes to an aplet’s VIEWS menu remain with the  
aplet. You need to invoke the command on the aplet  
again to change the VIEWS menu.  
All the programs that are called from the VIEWS  
menu are transferred when the aplet is transferred, for  
example to another calculator or to a PC.  
As part of the VIEWS menu configuration, you can  
specify programs that you want transferred with the  
aplet, but are not called as menu options. For  
example, these can be sub-programs that menu  
18-14  
Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
options use, or the program that defines the aplet’s  
VIEWS menu.  
You can include a “Start” option in the VIEWS menu  
to specify a program that you want to run  
automatically when the aplet starts. This program  
typically sets up the aplet’s initial configuration. The  
START option on the menu is also useful for resetting  
the aplet.  
Command syntax  
The syntax for the command is as follows:  
SETVIEWS  
"Prompt1";"ProgramName1";ViewNumber1;  
"Prompt2";"ProgramName2";ViewNumber2:  
(You can repeat as many Prompt/ProgramName/  
ViewNumber trios of arguments as you like.)  
Within each Prompt/ProgramName/ViewNumber trio,  
you separate each item with a semi-colon.  
Prompt  
Prompt is the text that is displayed for the corresponding  
entry in the Views menu. Enclose the prompt text in  
double quotes.  
Associating programs with your aplet  
If Prompt consists of a single space, then no entry appears  
in the view menu. The program specified in the  
ProgramName item is associated with the aplet and  
transferred whenever the aplet is transmitted. Typically,  
you do this if you want to transfer the Setviews program  
with the aplet, or you want to transfer a sub-program that  
other menu programs use.  
Auto-run programs  
If the Prompt item is “Start”, then the ProgramName  
program runs whenever you start the aplet. This is useful  
for setting up a program to configure the aplet. Users can  
select the Start item from the VIEWS menu to reset the  
aplet if they change configurations.  
You can also define a menu item called “Reset” which is  
auto-run if the user chooses the  
view.  
button in the APLET  
Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18-15  
ProgramName  
ProgramName is the name of the program that runs when  
the corresponding menu entry is selected. All programs  
that are identified in the aplet’s SETVIEWS command are  
transferred when the aplet is transmitted.  
ViewNumber  
ViewNumber is the number of a view to start after the  
program finishes running. For example, if you want the  
menu option to display the Plot view when the associated  
program finishes, you would specify 1 as the  
ViewNumber value.  
Including standard menu options  
To include one of an aplet’s standard VIEWS menu  
options in your customized menu, set up the arguments  
trio as follows:  
The first argument specifies the menu item name:  
Leave the argument empty to use the standard  
Views menu name for the item, or  
Enter a menu item name to replace the standard  
name.  
The second argument specifies the program to run:  
Leave the argument empty to run the standard  
menu option.  
Insert a program name to run the program before  
the standard menu option is executed.  
The third argument specifies the view and the menu  
number for the item. Determine the menu number  
from the View numbers table below.  
Note: SETVIEWS with no arguments resets the views  
to default of the base aplet.  
18-16  
Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
View numbers  
The Function aplet views are numbered as follows:  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
HOME  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
List Catalog  
Matrix Catalog  
Notepad Catalog  
Program Catalog  
Plot-Detail  
Plot  
Symbolic  
Numeric  
Plot-Setup  
Symbolic-Setup  
Numeric-Setup  
Views  
Plot-Table  
Overlay Plot  
Auto scale  
Decimal  
Note  
Sketch view  
Aplet Catalog  
Integer  
Trig  
View numbers from 15 on will vary according to the  
parent aplet. The list shown above is for the Function  
aplet. Whatever the normal VIEWS menu for the parent  
aplet, the first entry will become number 15, the second  
number 16 and so on.  
UNCHECK  
Unchecks (unselects) the corresponding function in the  
current aplet. For example, Uncheck 3 would uncheck F3  
if the current aplet is Function.  
UNCHECKn:  
Branch commands  
Branch commands let a program make a decision based  
on the result of one or more tests. Unlike the other  
programming commands, the branch commands work in  
logical groups. Therefore, the commands are described  
together rather than each independently.  
IF...THEN...END  
Executes a sequence of commands in the true-clause only  
if the test-clause evaluates to true. Its syntax is:  
IFtest-clause  
THENtrue-clause END  
Programming  
18-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Example  
1A :  
IF A==1  
THEN MSGBOX " A EQUALS 1" :  
END:  
IF... THEN... ELSE...  
END  
Executes the true-clause sequence of commands if the test-  
clause is true, or the false-clause sequence of commands  
if the test-clause is false.  
IF test-clause  
THEN true-clause ELSE false-clause END  
Example  
1A :  
IF A==1 THEN  
MSGBOX "A EQUALS 1" :  
ELSE  
MSGBOX "A IS NOT EQUAL TO 1" :  
END:  
CASE...END  
Executes a series of test-clause commands that execute  
the appropriate true-clause sequence of commands. Its  
syntax is:  
CASE  
IF test-clause THEN true-clause END  
1
1
IF test-clause THEN true-clause END  
2
2
.
.
.
IF test-clause THEN true-clause END  
n
n
END:  
When CASE is executed, test-clause is evaluated. If the  
1
test is true, true-clause is executed, and execution skips  
1
to END. If test-clause if false, execution proceeds to test-  
1
clause . Execution with the CASE structure continues until  
2
a true-clause is executed (or until all the test-clauses  
evaluate to false).  
IFERR...  
THEN...  
ELSE…  
END...  
Many conditions are automatically recognized by the HP  
39gs as error conditions and are automatically treated as  
errors in programs.  
18-18  
Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IFERR...THEN...ELSE…END allows a program to intercept  
error conditions that otherwise would cause the program  
to abort. Its syntax is:  
IFERR trap-clause  
THEN clause_1  
ELSE clause_2  
END:  
Example  
IFERR  
60/X Y:  
THEN  
MSGBOX "Error: X is zero.":  
ELSE  
MSGBOX "Value is "Y:  
END:  
RUN  
Runs the named program. If your program name contains  
special characters, such as a space, then you must  
enclose the file name in double quotes (" ").  
RUN"program name":or RUNprogramname:  
STOP  
Stops the current program.  
STOP:  
Drawing commands  
The drawing commands act on the display. The scale of  
the display depends on the current aplet's Xmin, Xmax,  
Ymin, and Ymax values. The following examples assume  
the hp 39gs default settings with the Function aplet as the  
current aplet.  
ARC  
Draws a circular arc, of given radius, whose centre is at  
(x,y) The arc is drawn from start_angle_measurement, to  
end_angle_measurement.  
ARCx;y;radius;start_angle_measurement;  
end_angle_measurement:  
Programming  
18-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Example  
ARC0;0;2;0;2π:  
FREEZE:  
Draws a circle centered  
at (0,0) of radius 2. The  
FREEZE command  
causes the circle to  
remain displayed on the screen until you press a key.  
BOX  
Draws a box with diagonally opposite corners (x1,y1) and  
(x2,y2).  
BOXx1;y1;x2;y2:  
Example  
BOX -1;-1;1;1:  
FREEZE:  
Draws a box, lower  
corner at (–1,–1),  
upper corner at (1,1)  
ERASE  
Clears the display  
ERASE:  
FREEZE  
LINE  
Halts the program, freezing the current display.  
Execution resumes when any key is pressed.  
Draws a line from (x1, y1) to (x2, y2).  
LINEx1;y1;x2;y2:  
PIXOFF  
PIXON  
TLINE  
Turns off the pixel at the specified coordinates (x,y).  
PIXOFFx;y:  
Turns on the pixel at the specified coordinates (x,y).  
PIXONx;y:  
Toggles the pixels along the line from (x1, y1) to (x2, y2)  
on and off. Any pixel that was turned off, is turned on;  
any pixel that was turned on, is turned off. TLINE can be  
used to erase a line.  
TLINEx1;y1;x2;y2:  
18-20  
Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Example  
TLINE 0;0;3;3:  
Erases previously drawn 45 degree line from (0,0) to  
(3,3), or draws that line if it doesn’t already exist.  
Graphic commands  
The graphic commands use the graphics variables G0  
through G9—or the Page variable from Sketch—as  
graphicname arguments. The position argument takes the  
form (x,y). Position coordinates depend on the current  
aplet’s scale, which is specified by Xmin, Xmax, Ymin,  
and Ymax. The upper left corner of the target graphic  
(graphic2) is at (Xmin,Ymax).  
You can capture the current display and store it in G0 by  
simultaneously pressing  
+
.
DISPLAY→  
DISPLAY  
Stores the current display in graphicname.  
DISPLAYgraphicname:  
Displays graphic from graphicname in the display.  
DISPLAY graphicname:  
GROB  
Creates a graphic from expression, using font_size, and  
stores the resulting graphic in graphicname. Font sizes  
are 1, 2, or 3. If the fontsize argument is 0, the HP 39gs  
creates a graphic display like that created by the SHOW  
operation.  
GROB graphicname;expression;fontsize:  
GROBNOT  
GROBOR  
Replaces graphic in graphicname with bitwise-inverted  
graphic.  
GROBNOT graphicname:  
Using the logical OR, superimposes graphicname2 onto  
graphicname1. The upper left corner of graphicname2 is  
placed at position.  
GROBORgraphicname1;(position);graphicname2:  
Example  
GROBOR G0; (1,1); G1:  
Programming  
18-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
will superimpose G1 onto G0 starting a position (1,1),  
where the position is given in terms of the current axes  
settings, not as a pixel position.  
GROBXOR  
Using the logical XOR, superimposes graphicname2 onto  
graphicname1. The upper left corner of graphicname2 is  
placed at position.  
GROBXOR  
graphicname1;(position);graphicname2:  
MAKEGROB  
Creates graphic with given width, height, and  
hexadecimal data, and stores it in graphicname.  
MAKEGROB graphicname;width;height;hexdata:  
PLOT→  
Stores the Plot view display as a graphic in graphicname.  
PLOTgraphicname:  
PLOTand DISPLAYcan be used to transfer a copy  
of the current PLOT view into the sketch view of the aplet  
for later use and editing.  
Example  
1 PageNum:  
PLOTPage:  
DISPLAY Page:  
FREEZE:  
This program stores the current PLOT view to the first page  
in the sketch view of the current aplet and then displays  
the sketch as a graphic object until any key is pressed.  
PLOT  
Puts graph from graphicname into the Plot view display.  
PLOTgraphicname:  
REPLACE  
Replaces portion of graphic in graphicname1 with  
graphicname2,starting at position.REPLACEalso  
works for lists and matrices.  
REPLACE  
graphicname1;(position);graphicname2:  
SUB  
Extracts a portion of the named graphic (or list or matrix),  
and stores it in a new variable, name. The portion is  
specified by position and positions.  
SUBname;graphicname;(position);(positions):  
18-22  
Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
ZEROGROB  
Creates a blank graphic with given width and height,  
and stores it in graphicname.  
ZEROGROB graphicname;width;height:  
Loop commands  
Loop hp allow a program to execute a routine repeatedly.  
The HP 39gs has three loop structures. The example  
programs below illustrate each of these structures  
incrementing the variable A from 1 to 12.  
DO…UNTIL …END Do... Until... Endis a loop command that executes the  
loop-clause repeatedly until test-clause returns a true  
(nonzero) result. Because the test is executed after the  
loop-clause, the loop-clause is always executed at least  
once. Its syntax is:  
DO loop-clause UNTIL test-clause END  
1 A:  
DO  
A + 1 A  
DISP 3;A:  
UNTIL A == 12 END:  
WHILE…  
REPEAT…  
END  
While... Repeat... Endis a loop command that  
repeatedly evaluates test-clause and executes loop-clause  
sequence if the test is true. Because the test-clause is  
executed before the loop-clause, the loop-clause is not  
executed if the test is initially false. Its syntax is:  
WHILEtest-clause REPEAT loop-clause END  
1A:  
WHILE A < 12 REPEAT  
A+1 A  
DISP 3;A:  
END:  
FOR…TO…STEP  
...END  
FOR name=start-expression TO end-expression  
[STEP increment];  
loop-clause END  
FOR A=1 TO 12 STEP 1;  
DISP 3;A:  
END:  
Programming  
18-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Note that the STEP parameter is optional. If it is omitted,  
a step value of 1 is assumed.  
BREAK  
Terminates loop.  
BREAK:  
Matrix commands  
The matrix commands take variables M0–M9 as  
arguments.  
ADDCOL  
Add Column. Inserts values into a column before  
column_number in the specified matrix. You enter the  
values as a vector. The values must be separated by  
commas and the number of values must be the same as  
the number of rows in the matrix name.  
ADDCOL  
name;[value ,...,value ];column_number:  
1
n
ADDROW  
Add Row. Inserts values into a row before row_number in  
the specified matrix. You enter the values as a vector. The  
values must be separated by commas and the number of  
values must be the same as the number of columns in the  
matrix name.  
ADDROW name;[value ,..., value ];row_number:  
1
n
DELCOL  
Delete Column. Deletes the specified column from the  
specified matrix.  
DELCOL name;column_number:  
DELROW  
EDITMAT  
Delete Row. Deletes the specified row from the specified  
matrix.  
DELROWname;row_number:  
Starts the Matrix Editor and displays the specified matrix.  
If used in programming, returns to the program when user  
presses  
.
EDITMATname:  
18-24  
Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
RANDMAT  
Creates random matrix with a specified number of rows  
and columns and stores the result in name  
(name must be M0...M9). The entries will be integers  
ranging from –9 to 9.  
RANDMATname;rows;columns:  
REDIM  
Redimensions the specified matrix or vector to size. For a  
matrix, size is a list of two integers {n1,n2}. For a vector,  
size is a list containing one integer {n}.  
REDIMname;size:  
REPLACE  
Replaces portion of a matrix or vector stored in name with  
an object starting at position start. start for a matrix is a  
list containing two numbers; for a vector, it is a single  
number. Replace also works with lists and graphics.  
REPLACEname;start;object:  
SCALE  
Multiplies the specified row_number of the specified  
matrix by value.  
SCALEname;value;rownumber:  
SCALEADD  
SUB  
Multiplies the row of the matrix name by value, then adds  
this result to the second specified row.  
SCALEADDname;value;row1;row2:  
Extracts a sub-object—a portion of a list, matrix, or  
graphic from object—and stores it into name. start and  
end are each specified using a list with two numbers for  
a matrix, a number for vector or lists, or an ordered pair,  
(X,Y), for graphics.  
SUBname;object;start;end:  
SWAPCOL  
Swaps Columns. Exchanges column1 and column2 of the  
specified matrix.  
SWAPCOL name;column1;column2:  
SWAPROW  
Swap Rows. Exchanges row1 and row2 in the specified  
matrix.  
SWAPROWname;row1;row2:  
Programming  
18-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Print commands  
These commands print to an HP infrared printer, for  
example the HP 82240B printer.  
PRDISPLAY  
PRHISTORY  
PRVAR  
Prints the contents of the display.  
PRDISPLAY:  
Prints all objects in the history.  
PRHISTORY:  
Prints name and contents of variablename.  
PRVARvariablename:  
You can also use the PRVAR command to print the  
contents of a program or a note.  
PRVARprogramname;PROG:  
PRVARnotename;NOTE:  
Prompt commands  
BEEP  
Beeps at the frequency and for the time you specify.  
BEEPfrequency;seconds:  
CHOOSE  
Creates a choose box, which is a box containing a list of  
options from which the user chooses one. Each option is  
numbered, 1 through n. The result of the choose  
command is to store the number of the option chosen in a  
variable. The syntax is  
CHOOSEvariable_name;title;option ;option ;  
1
2
...option :  
n
where variable_name is the number of the option that will  
be highlighted by default whenever the choose box is  
displayed, title is the text displayed in the title bar of the  
choose box, and option ...option are the options listed  
1
n
in the choose box.  
18-26  
Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Example  
3 A:CHOOSE A;  
"COMIC STRIPS";  
"DILBERT";  
"CALVIN&HOBBES";  
"BLONDIE":  
CLRVAR  
Clears the specified variable. The syntax is:  
CLRVAR variable :  
Example  
If you have stored  
{1,2,3,4} in variable L1,  
entering CLVAR L1  
will clear L1.  
DISP  
Displays textitem in a row of the display at the  
line_number. A text item consists of any number of  
expressions and quoted strings of text. The expressions  
are evaluated and turned into strings. Lines are numbered  
from the top of the screen, 1 being the top and 7 being  
the bottom.  
DISP line_number;textitem:  
Example  
DISP 3;"A is" 2+2  
Result: A is 4  
(displayed on line 3)  
DISPXY  
Displays object at position (x_pos, y_pos) in size font. The  
syntax is:  
DISPXY x_pos;y_pos;font;object:  
The value of object can be a text string, a variable, or a  
combination of both. x_pos and y_pos are relative to the  
current settings of Xmin, Xmax, Ymin and Ymax (which  
you set in the PLOT SETUP view). The value of font is either  
1 (small) or 2 (large).  
Programming  
18-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Example  
DISPXY  
–3.5;1.5;2;"HELLO  
WORLD":  
DISPTIME  
Displays the current date and time.  
DISPTIME  
To set the date and time, simply store the correct settings  
in the date and time variables. Use the following formats:  
M.DDYYYY for the date and H.MMSSfor the time.  
Examples  
5.152000DATE(sets the date to May 15, 2000).  
10.1500TIME(sets the time to 10:15 am).  
EDITMAT  
Matrix Editor. Opens the Matrix editor for the specified  
matrix. Returns to the program when user presses  
EDITMAT matrixname:  
The EDITMAT command can also be used to create  
matrices.  
1. Press  
2. Press  
CMDS  
M 1, and then press  
.
The Matrix catalog opens with M1 available for  
editing.  
EDITMAT matrixname is an alternative to opening  
the matrix editor with matrixname.  
FREEZE  
This command prevents the display from being updated  
after the program runs. This allows you to view the  
graphics created by the program. Cancel FREEZEby  
pressing any key.  
FREEZE:  
18-28  
Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
GETKEY  
INPUT  
Waits for a key, then stores the keycode rc.p in name,  
where r is row number, c is column number, and p is key-  
plane number. The key-planes numbers are: 1 for  
unshifted; 2 for shifted; 4 for alpha-shifted; and 5 for both  
alpha-shifted and shifted.  
GETKEYname:  
Creates an input form with a title bar and one field. The  
field has a label and a default value. There is text help at  
the bottom of the form. The user enters a value and  
presses the  
menu key. The value that the user enters  
is stored in the variable name. The title, label, and help  
items are text strings and need to be enclosed in double  
quotes.  
Use  
CHARS to type the quote marks " ".  
INPUTname;title,label;help;default:  
Example  
INPUT R; "Circular Area";  
"Radius";  
"Enter Number";1:  
MSGBOX  
Displays a message box containing textitem. A text item  
consists of any number of expressions and quoted strings  
of text. The expressions are evaluated and turned into  
strings of text.  
For example, "AREA IS:"2+2becomes AREA IS:4.  
Use  
CHARS to type the quote marks " ".  
MSGBOXtextitem:  
Example  
1A:  
MSGBOX "AREA IS: "π*A^2:  
You can also use the NoteText variable to provide text  
arguments. This can be used to insert line breaks. For  
example, press  
NOTE and type AREAIS  
.
The position line  
MSGBOXNoteText " " π*A^2:  
will display the same message box as the previous  
example.  
Programming  
18-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
PROMPT  
WAIT  
Displays an input box with name as the title, and prompts  
for a value for name. name can be a variable such as  
A…Z, θ, L1…l9, C1…C9 or Z1…Z9.  
PROMPTname:  
Halts program execution for the specified number of  
seconds.  
WAITseconds:  
Stat-One and Stat-Two commands  
The following commands are used for analyzing one-  
variable and two-variable statistical data.  
Stat-One commands  
DO1VSTATS  
Calculates STATS using datasetname and stores the  
results in the corresponding variables: NΣ, TotΣ, MeanΣ,  
PVarΣ, SVarΣ, PSDev, SSDev, MinΣ, Q1, Median, Q3,  
and MaxΣ. Datasetname can be H1, H2, ..., or H5.  
Datasetname must include at least two data points.  
DO1VSTATSdatasetname:  
SETFREQ  
Sets datasetname frequency according to column or  
value. Datasetname can be H1, H2,..., or H5, column  
can be C0–C9 and value can be any positive integer.  
SETFREQdatasetname;column:  
or  
SETFREQdefinition;value:  
SETSAMPLE  
Sets datasetname sample according to column.  
Datasetname can be H1–H5, and column can be  
CO–C9.  
SETSAMPLEdatasetname;column:  
Stat-Two commands  
DO2VSTATS  
Calculates STATS using datasetname and stores the  
results in corresponding variables: MeanX, ΣX, ΣX2,  
MeanY, ΣY, ΣY2, ΣXY, Corr, PCov, SCov, and RELERR.  
18-30  
Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Datasetname can be SI, S2,..., or S5. Datasetname must  
include at least two pairs of data points.  
DO2VSTATSdatasetname:  
SETDEPEND  
SETINDEP  
Sets datasetname dependent column. Datasetname can  
be S1, S2, …, or S5 and column can be C0–C9.  
SETDEPENDdatasetname;column:  
Sets datasetname independent column. Datasetname can  
be S1, S2,…, or S5 and column can be C0–C9.  
SETINDEPdatasetname;column:  
Storing and retrieving variables in programs  
variables. Home variables are used for real numbers,  
complex numbers, graphics, lists, and matrices. Home  
variables keep the same values in HOME and in aplets.  
Aplet variables are those whose values depend on the  
current aplet. The aplet variables are used in  
programming to emulate the definitions and settings you  
make when working with aplets interactively.  
You use the Variable menu (  
) to retrieve either  
Home variables or aplet variables. See “The VARS menu”  
on page 14-4. Not all variables are available in every  
aplet. S1fit–S5fit, for example, are only available in the  
Statistics aplet. Under each variable name is a list of the  
aplets where the variable can be used.  
Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18-31  
   
Plot-view variables  
Area  
Function  
Contains the last value found by the Area function in Plot-  
FCN menu.  
Axes  
All Aplets  
Turns axes on or off.  
From Plot Setup, check (or uncheck) AXES.  
or  
In a program, type:  
1 Axes—to turn axes on (default).  
0 Axes—to turn axes off.  
Connect  
Function  
Parametric  
Polar  
Draws lines between successively plotted points.  
From Plot Setup, check (or uncheck) CONNECT.  
or  
Solve  
In a program, type  
Statistics  
1 Connect—to connect plotted points (default,  
except in Statistics where the default is off).  
0 Connect—not to connect plotted points.  
Coord  
Turns the coordinate-display mode in Plot view on or off.  
Function  
Parametric  
Polar  
Sequence  
Solve  
From Plot view, use the Menu mean key to toggle  
coordinate display on an off.  
In a program, type  
1 Coord—to turn coordinate display on (default).  
0 Coord—to turn coordinate display off.  
Statistics  
Extremum  
Function  
Contains the last value found by the Extremum operation  
in the Plot-FCN menu.  
FastRes  
Function  
Solve  
Toggles resolution between plotting in every other column  
(faster), or plotting in every column (more detail).  
From Plot Setup, choose Faster or More Detail.  
or  
In a program, type  
1 FastRes—for faster.  
0 FastRes—for more detail (default).  
18-32  
Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Grid  
All Aplets  
Turns the background grid in Plot view on or off. From Plot  
setup, check (or uncheck) GRID.  
or  
In a program, type  
1 Gridto turn the grid on.  
0 Gridto turn the grid off (default).  
Hmin/Hmax  
Statistics  
Defines minimum and maximum values for histogram  
bars.  
From Plot Setup for one-variable statistics, set values for  
HRNG.  
or  
In a program, type  
n1 Hmin  
n2 Hmax  
where n2 > n1  
Hwidth  
Statistics  
Sets the width of histogram bars.  
From Plot Setup in 1VAR stats set a value for Hwidth  
or  
In a program, type  
nHwidth  
Indep  
All Aplets  
Defines the value of the independent variable used in  
tracing mode.  
In a program, type  
nIndep  
InvCross  
All Aplets  
Toggles between solid crosshairs or inverted crosshairs.  
(Inverted is useful if the background is solid).  
From Plot Setup, check (or uncheck) InvCross  
or  
In a program, type:  
1 InvCross—to invert the crosshairs.  
0 InvCross—for solid crosshairs (default).  
Programming  
18-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Isect  
Function  
Contains the last value found by the Intersection function  
in the Plot-FCN menu.  
Labels  
All Aplets  
Draws labels in Plot view showing X and Y ranges.  
From Plot Setup, check (or uncheck) Labels  
or  
In a program, type  
1 Labels—to turn labels on.  
0 Labels—to turn labels off (default).  
Nmin / Nmax  
Sequence  
Defines the minimum and maximum independent variable  
values. Appears as the NRNGfields in the Plot Setup input  
form.  
From Plot Setup, enter values for NRNG.  
or  
In a program, type  
n1 Nmin  
n2 Nmax  
where n2 > n1  
Recenter  
All Aplets  
Recenters at the crosshairs locations when zooming.  
From Plot-Zoom-Set Factors, check (or uncheck)  
Recenter  
or  
In a program, type  
1 Recenter— to turn recenter on (default).  
0 Recenter—to turn recenter off.  
Root  
Function  
Contains the last value found by the Root function in the  
Plot-FCN menu.  
18-34  
Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
S1mark–S5mark  
Statistics  
Sets the mark to use for scatter plots.  
From Plot Setup for two-variable statistics, S1mark-  
S5mark, then choose a mark.  
or  
In a program, type  
n S1mark  
where n is 1,2,3,...5  
SeqPlot  
Sequence  
Enables you to choose types of sequence plot: Stairstep  
or Cobweb.  
From Plot Setup, select SeqPlot, then choose  
Stairstepor Cobweb.  
or  
In a program, type  
1 SeqPlot—for Stairstep.  
2 SeqPlot—for Cobweb.  
Simult  
Enables you to choose between simultaneous and  
sequential graphing of all selected expressions.  
Function  
Parametric  
Polar  
From Plot Setup, check (or uncheck) _SIMULT  
or  
Sequence  
In a program, type  
1 Simult—for simultaneous graphing (default).  
0 Simult—for sequential graphing.  
Slope  
Function  
Contains the last value found by the Slope function in the  
Plot-FCN menu.  
StatPlot  
Statistics  
Enables you to choose types of 1-variable statistics plot  
between Histogram or Box-and-Whisker.  
From Plot Setup, select StatPlot, then choose  
Histogramor BoxWhisker.  
or  
In a program, type  
1StatPlot—for Histogram.  
2StatPlot—for Box-and-Whisker.  
Programming  
18-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Umin/Umax  
Polar  
Sets the minimum and maximum independent values.  
Appears as the URNGfield in the Plot Setup input form.  
From the Plot Setup input form, enter values for URNG.  
or  
In a program, type  
n1 Umin  
n2 Umax  
where n2 > n1  
Ustep  
Polar  
Sets the step size for an independent variable.  
From the Plot Setup input form, enter values for USTEP.  
or  
In a program, type  
n Ustep  
where n > 0  
Tmin / Tmax  
Parametric  
Sets the minimum and maximum independent variable  
values. Appears as the TRNGfield in the Plot Setup input  
form.  
From Plot Setup, enter values for TRNG.  
or  
In a program, type  
n1 Tmin  
n2 Tmax  
where n2 > n1  
Tracing  
Turns the tracing mode on or off in Plot view.  
In a program, type  
All Aplets  
1 Tracing—to turn Tracing mode on (default).  
0 Tracing—to turn Tracing mode off.  
18-36  
Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Tstep  
Sets the step size for the independent variable.  
Parametric  
From the Plot Setup input form, enter values for TSTEP.  
or  
In a program, type  
n Tstep  
where n > 0  
Xcross  
Sets the horizontal coordinate of the crosshairs. Only  
works with TRACEoff.  
All Aplets  
In a program, type  
n Xcross  
Ycross  
Sets the vertical coordinate of the crosshairs. Only works  
with TRACEoff.  
All Aplets  
In a program, type  
n Ycross  
Xtick  
All Aplets  
Sets the distance between tick marks for the horizontal  
axis.  
From the Plot Setup input form, enter a value for Xtick.  
or  
In a program, type  
n Xtick where n > 0  
Ytick  
All Aplets  
Sets the distance between tick marks for the vertical axis.  
From the Plot Setup input form, enter a value for Ytick.  
or  
In a program, type  
n Ytick where n > 0  
Xmin / Xmax  
All Aplets  
Sets the minimum and maximum horizontal values of the  
plot screen. Appears as the XRNGfields (horizontal  
range) in the Plot Setup input form.  
From Plot Setup, enter values for XRNG.  
or  
In a program, type  
Programming  
18-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
n1 Xmin  
n2 Xmax  
where n2 > n1  
Ymin / Ymax  
All Aplets  
Sets the minimum and maximum vertical values of the plot  
screen. Appears as the YRNGfields (vertical range) in the  
Plot Setup input form.  
From Plot Setup, enter the values for YRNG.  
or  
In a program, type  
n1 Ymin  
n2 Ymax  
where n2 > n1  
Xzoom  
All Aplets  
Sets the horizontal zoom factor.  
From Plot-ZOOM-Set Factors, enter the value for XZOOM.  
or  
In a program, type  
n XZOOM  
where n > 0  
The default value is 4.  
Yzoom  
All Aplets  
Sets the vertical zoom factor.  
From Plot-ZOOM-Set Factors, enter the value for YZOOM.  
or  
In a program, type  
n YZOOM  
The default value is 4.  
18-38  
Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Symbolic-view variables  
Angle  
All Aplets  
Sets the angle mode.  
From Symbolic Setup, choose Degrees, Radians, or  
Gradsfor angle measure.  
or  
In a program, type  
1Angle—for Degrees.  
2Angle—for Radians.  
3Angle—for Grads.  
F1...F9, F0  
Function  
Can contain any expression. Independent variable is X.  
Example  
'SIN(X)' F1(X)  
You must put single quotes around an expression to keep  
it from being evaluated before it is stored. Use  
CHARS to type the single quote mark.  
X1, Y1...X9,Y9  
X0,Y0  
Parametric  
Can contain any expression. Independent variable is T.  
Example  
'SIN(4*T)' Y1(T):'2*SIN(6*T)' ꢂ  
X1(T)  
R1...R9, R0  
Polar  
Can contain any expression. Independent variable is θ.  
Example  
'2*SIN(2*θ)' R1(θ)  
U1...U9, U0  
Sequence  
Can contain any expression. Independent variable is N.  
Example  
RECURSE (U,U(N-1)*N,1,2) U1(N)  
E1...E9, E0  
Solve  
Can contain any equation or expression. Independent  
variable is selected by highlighting it in Numeric View.  
Example  
'X+Y*X-2=Y' E1  
Programming  
18-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S1fit...S5fit  
Statistics  
Sets the type of fit to be used by the FIT operation in  
drawing the regression line.  
From Symbolic Setup view, specify the fit in the field for  
S1FIT, S2FIT, etc.  
or  
In a program, store one of the following constant numbers  
or names into a variable S1fit, S2fit, etc.  
1 Linear  
2 LogFit  
3 ExpFit  
4 Power  
5 QuadFit  
6 Cubic  
7 Logist  
8 ExpFit  
9 TrigFit  
10 UserDefined  
Example  
Cubic S2fit  
or  
6 S2fit  
18-40  
Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Numeric-view variables  
The following aplet variables control the Numeric view.  
The value of the variable applies to the current aplet only.  
C1...C9, C0  
Statistics  
C0through C9, for columns of data. Can contain lists.  
Enter data in the Numeric view  
or  
In a program, type  
LISTCn  
where n = 0, 1, 2, 3 ... 9  
Digits  
All Aplets  
Number of decimal places to use for Number format in  
the HOME view and for labeling axes in the Plot view.  
From the Modes view, enter a value in the second field of  
NumberFormat.  
or  
In a program, type  
n Digits  
where 0<n <11  
Format  
All Aplets  
Defines the number display format to use for numeric  
format in the HOME view and for labeling axes in the Plot  
view.  
From the Modes view, choose Standard, Fixed,  
Scientific, Engineering,Fraction or Mixed  
Fraction in the Number Formatfield.  
or  
In a program, store the constant number (or its name) into  
the variable Format.  
1 Standard  
2 Fixed  
3 Sci  
4 Eng  
5 Fraction  
6 MixFraction  
Programming  
18-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note that if Fraction or Mixed Fraction is chosen, the  
setting will be ignored when labeling axes in Plot view. A  
setting of Scientific will be used instead.  
Example  
ScientificFormat  
or  
3 Format  
NumCol  
All Aplets except  
Statistics aplet  
Sets the column to be highlighted in Numeric view.  
In a program, type  
n NumCol  
where n can be 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9.  
NumFont  
Function  
Parametric  
Polar  
Sequence  
Statistics  
Enables you to choose the font size in Numeric view.  
Does not appear in the Num Setup input form.  
Corresponds to the  
key in Numeric view.  
In a program, type  
0 NumFontfor small (default).  
1 NumFontfor big.  
NumIndep  
Function  
Parametric  
Polar  
Specifies the list of independent values to be used by  
Build Your Own Table.  
In a program, type  
LISTNumIndep  
Sequence  
NumRow  
All Aplets except  
Statistics aplet  
Sets the row to be highlighted in Numeric view.  
In a program, type  
n NumRow  
where n >0  
NumStart  
Function  
Parametric  
Polar  
Sets the starting value for a table in Numeric view.  
From Num Setup, enter a value for NUMSTART.  
or  
Sequence  
In a program, type  
n NumStart  
18-42  
Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NumStep  
Function  
Parametric  
Polar  
Sets the step size (increment value) for an independent  
variable in Numeric view.  
From Num Setup, enter a value for NUMSTEP.  
or  
Sequence  
In a program, type  
n NumStep  
where n > 0  
NumType  
Function  
Parametric  
Polar  
Sets the table format.  
From Num Setup, choose Automaticor BuildYour  
Own.  
or  
Sequence  
In a program, type  
0 NumTypefor Build Your Own.  
1 NumTypefor Automatic (default).  
NumZoom  
Function  
Parametric  
Polar  
Sets the zoom factor in the Numeric view.  
From Num Setup, type in a value for NUMZOOM.  
or  
Sequence  
In a program, type  
n NumZoom  
where n > 0  
StatMode  
Statistics  
Enables you to choose between 1-variable and 2-variable  
statistics in the Statistics aplet. Does not appear in the Plot  
Setup input form. Corresponds to the  
menu keys in Numeric View.  
and  
In a program, store the constant name (or its number) into  
the variable StatMode. 1VAR=1, 2VAR=2.  
Example  
1VAR StatMode  
or  
1 StatMode  
Programming  
18-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note variables  
The following aplet variable is available in Note view.  
NoteText  
All Aplets  
Use NoteTextto recall text previously entered in Note  
view.  
Sketch variables  
The following aplet variables are available in Sketch  
view.  
Page  
All Aplets  
Sets a page in a sketch set. The graphics can be viewed  
one at a time using the  
and  
keys.  
The Page variable refers to the currently displayed page  
of a sketch set.  
In a program, type  
graphicname Page  
PageNum  
All Aplets  
Sets a number for referring to a particular page of the  
sketch set (in Sketch view).  
In a program, type the page that is shown when  
SKETCH is pressed.  
n PageNum  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19  
Extending aplets  
Aplets are the application environments where you  
explore different classes of mathematical operations.  
You can extend the capability of the HP 39gs in the  
following ways:  
Create new aplets, based on existing aplets, with  
specific configurations such as angle measure,  
graphical or tabular settings, and annotations.  
Transmit aplets between HP 39gs calculators via an  
infra red link.  
Download e-lessons (teaching aplets) from  
Hewlett-Packard’s Calculator web site.  
Program new aplets. See chapter 18,  
“Programming”, for further details.  
Creating new aplets based on existing aplets  
You can create a new aplet based on an existing aplet.  
To create a new aplet, save an existing aplet under a new  
name, then modify the aplet to add the configurations  
and the functionality that you want.  
Information that defines an aplet is saved automatically  
as it is entered into the calculator.  
To keep as much memory available for storage as  
possible, delete any aplets you no longer need.  
Example  
This example demonstrates how to create a new aplet by  
saving a copy of the built-in Solve aplet. The new aplet is  
saved under the name “TRIANGLES” contains the  
formulas commonly used in calculations involving  
right-angled triangles.  
Extending aplets  
19-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1. Open the Solve aplet and save it under the new  
name.  
Solve  
|
T R I A N G L E S  
2. Enter the four formulas:  
θ
O
H
θ
A
H
θ
O
A
A
B
C
3. Decide whether you want the aplet to operate in  
Degrees, Radians, or Grads.  
MODES  
Degrees  
4. View the Aplet Library. The “TRIANGLES” aplet is  
listed in the Aplet Library.  
The Solve aplet can now  
be reset and used for  
other problems.  
19-2  
Extending aplets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a customized aplet  
To use the “Triangles” aplet, simply select the appropriate  
formula, change to the Numeric view and solve for the  
missing variable.  
Find the length of a ladder leaning against a vertical wall  
o
if it forms an angle of 35 with the horizontal and  
extends 5 metres up the wall.  
1. Select the aplet.  
TRIANGLES  
2. Choose the sine formula  
in E1.  
3. Change to the Numeric  
view and enter the  
known values.  
35  
5
4. Solve for the missing  
value.  
The length of the ladder  
is approximately 8.72 metres  
Resetting an aplet  
Resetting an aplet clears all data and resets all default  
settings.  
To reset an aplet, open the Library, select the aplet and  
press  
.
You can only reset an aplet that is based on a built-in  
aplet if the programmer who created it has provided a  
Reset option.  
Extending aplets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19-3  
 
Annotating an aplet with notes  
The Note view (  
NOTE) attaches a note to the current  
aplet. See Chapter 17, “Notes and sketches”.  
Annotating an aplet with sketches  
The Sketch view (  
SKETCH) attaches a picture to the  
current aplet. See chapter 17, “Notes and sketches”.  
H I N T  
Notes and sketches that you attach to an aplet become  
part of the aplet. When you transfer the aplet to another  
calculator, the associated note and sketch are transferred  
as well.  
Downloading e-lessons from the web  
In addition to the standard aplets that come with the  
calculator, you can download aplets from the world wide  
web. For example, Hewlett-Packard’s Calculators web  
site contains aplets that demonstrate certain mathematical  
concepts. Note that you need the Graphing Calculator  
Connectivity Kit in order to load aplets from a PC.  
Hewlett-Packard’s Calculators web site can be found at:  
http://www.hp.com/calculators  
Sending and receiving aplets  
A convenient way to distribute or share problems in class  
and to turn in homework is to transmit (copy) aplets  
directly from one HP 39gs to another. This can take place  
via the infrared port or via a suitable cable. (You can use  
a serial cable with a 4-pin mini-USB connector, which  
plugs into the RS232 port on the calculator. The serial  
cable is available as a separate accessory.)  
You can also send aplets to, and receive aplets from, a  
PC. This requires special software running on the PC (such  
as the PC Connectivity Kit). A USB cable with a 5-pin mini-  
USB connector is provided with the hp39gs for  
connecting with a PC. It plugs into the USB port on the  
calculator.  
19-4  
Extending aplets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
To transmit  
an aplet  
1. Connect the PC or aplet disk drive to the calculator by  
cable  
or  
align the two calculators’ infrared ports by matching  
up the triangle marks on the rims of the calculators.  
Place the calculators no more than 4 inches (10 cm)  
apart.  
2. Sending calculator: Open the Library, highlight the  
aplet to send, and press  
.
The SEND TO menu appears with the following  
options:  
HP39G (IRDA) = to send via high-speed infrared  
HP39/40 (USB) = to send via the USB port  
HP39/40 (SER) = to send via the RS232 serial port  
USB DISK DRIVE = to send to a disk drive via the USB  
port  
SER. DISK DRIVE = to send to a disk drive via the  
RS232 serial port  
Note: choose a disk drive option if you are using  
the hp39gs connectivity kit to transfer the aplet.  
Highlight your selection and press  
.
If transmitting to a disk drive, you have the  
options of sending to the current (default)  
directory or to another directory.  
3. Receiving calculator: Open the aplet library and  
press  
.
The RECEIVE FROM menu appears with the following  
options:  
HP39G (IRDA) = to receive via high-speed infrared  
HP39G = to receive via low-speed infrared  
HP39/40 (USB) = to receive via the USB port  
HP39/40 (SER) = to receive via the RS232 serial port  
USB DISK DRIVE = to receive from a disk drive via the  
USB port  
SER. DISK DRIVE = to receive from a disk drive via the  
RS232 serial port  
Extending aplets  
19-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Note: choose a disk drive option if you are using  
the hp39gs connectivity kit to transfer the aplet.  
Highlight your selection and press  
.
The Transmit annunciator— —is displayed until  
transmission is complete.  
If you are using the PC Connectivity Kit to download  
aplets from a PC, you will see a list of aplets in the PC’s  
current directory. Check as many items as you would like  
to receive.  
Sorting items in the aplet library menu list  
Once you have entered information into an aplet, you  
have defined a new version of an aplet. The information  
is automatically saved under the current aplet name, such  
as “Function.” To create additional aplets of the same  
type, you must give the current aplet a new name.  
The advantage of storing an aplet is to allow you to keep  
a copy of a working environment for later use.  
The aplet library is where you go to manage your aplets.  
Press  
. Highlight (using the arrow keys) the name  
of the aplet you want to act on.  
To sort the  
aplet list  
In the aplet library, press  
. Select the sorting scheme  
and press  
.
Chronologicallyproduces a chronological order  
based on the date an aplet was last used. (The last-  
used aplet appears first, and so on.)  
Alphabeticallyproduces an alphabetical order  
by aplet name.  
To delete an  
aplet  
You cannot delete a built-in aplet. You can only clear its  
data and reset its default settings.  
To delete a customized aplet, open the aplet library,  
highlight the aplet to be deleted, and press  
. To  
delete all custom aplets, press  
CLEAR.  
19-6  
Extending aplets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
R
Reference information  
Glossary  
aplet  
A small application, limited to one  
topic. The built-in aplet types are  
Function, Parametric, Polar,  
Sequence, Solve, Statistics,  
Inference, Finance, Trig Explorer,  
Quad Explorer, Linear Solver and  
Triangle Solve. An aplet can be filled  
with the data and solutions for a  
specific problem. It is reusable (like a  
program, but easier to use) and it  
records all your settings and  
definitions.  
command  
An operation for use in programs.  
Commands can store results in  
variables, but do not display results.  
Arguments are separated by semi-  
colons, such as DISP  
expression;line#.  
expression  
function  
A number, variable, or algebraic  
expression (numbers plus functions)  
that produces a value.  
An operation, possibly with  
arguments, that returns a result. It  
does not store results in variables. The  
arguments must be enclosed in  
parentheses and separated with  
commas (or periods in Comma  
mode), such as  
CROSS(matrix1,matrix2).  
HOME  
Library  
The basic starting point of the  
calculator. Go to HOME to do  
calculations.  
For aplet management: to start, save,  
reset, send and receive aplets.  
R-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
list  
A set of values separated by commas  
(periods if the Decimal Mark mode is  
set to Comma) and enclosed in  
braces. Lists are commonly used to  
enter statistical data and to evaluate  
a function with multiple values.  
Created and manipulated by the List  
editor and catalog.  
matrix  
A two-dimensional array of values  
separated by commas (periods if the  
Decimal Mark mode is set to Comma)  
and enclosed in nested brackets.  
Created and manipulated by the  
Matrix catalog and editor. Vectors  
are also handled by the Matrix  
catalog and editor.  
menu  
A choice of options given in the  
display. It can appear as a list or as  
a set of menu-key labels across the  
bottom of the display.  
menu keys  
The top row of keys. Their operations  
depend on the current context. The  
labels along the bottom of the display  
show the current meanings.  
note  
Text that you write in the Notepad or  
in the Note view for a specific aplet.  
program  
sketch  
A reusable set of instructions that you  
record using the Program editor.  
A drawing that you make in the  
Sketch view for a specific aplet.  
variable  
The name of a number, list, matrix,  
note, or graphic that is stored in  
memory. Use  
to retrieve.  
to store and use  
vector  
A one-dimensional array of values  
separated by commas (periods if the  
Decimal Mark mode is set to Comma)  
and enclosed in single brackets.  
Created and manipulated by the  
Matrix catalog and editor.  
R-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
views  
The possible contexts for an aplet:  
Plot, Plot Setup, Numeric, Numeric  
Setup, Symbolic, Symbolic Setup,  
Sketch, Note, and special views like  
split screens.  
Resetting the HP 39gs  
If the calculator “locks up” and seems to be stuck, you  
must reset it. This is much like resetting a PC. It cancels  
certain operations, restores certain conditions, and clears  
temporary memory locations. However, it does not clear  
stored data (variables, aplet databases, programs) unless  
you use the procedure, “To erase all memory and reset  
defaults”.  
To reset using  
the keyboard  
Press and hold the  
key and the third menu key  
simultaneously, then release them.  
If the calculator does not respond to the above key  
sequence, then:  
1. Turn the calculator over and locate the small hole in  
the back of the calculator.  
2. Insert the end of a straightened metal paper clip into  
the hole as far as it will go. Hold it there for 1  
second, then remove it.  
3. Press  
If necessary, press  
and the first and  
last menu keys simultaneously. (Note: This will erase  
your calculator memory.)  
To erase all memory and reset defaults  
If the calculator does not respond to the above resetting  
procedures, you might need to restart it by erasing all of  
memory. You will lose everything you have stored. All  
factory-default settings are restored.  
1. Press and hold the  
key, the first menu key, and  
the last menu key simultaneously.  
2. Release all keys in the reverse order.  
Note: To cancel this process, release only the top-row  
keys, then press the third menu key.  
R-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
If the calculator does not turn on  
If the HP 39gs does not turn on follow the steps below  
until the calculator turns on. You may find that the  
calculator turns on before you have completed the  
procedure. If the calculator still does not turn on, please  
contact Customer Support for further information.  
1. Press and hold the  
2. Press and hold the  
key for 10 seconds.  
key and the third menu key  
simultaneously. Release the third menu key, then  
release the key.  
3. Press and hold the  
key, the first menu key, and  
the sixth menu key simultaneously. Release the sixth  
menu key, then release the first menu key, and then  
release the  
key.  
4. Locate the small hole in the back of the calculator.  
Insert the end of a straightened metal paper clip into  
the hole as far as it will go. Hold it there for 1  
second, then remove it. Press the  
5. Remove the batteries (see “Batteries” on page R-4),  
press and hold the key for 10 seconds, and  
then put the batteries back in. Press the key.  
key.  
Operating details  
Operating temperature: 0° to 45°C (32° to 113°F).  
Storage temperature: –20° to 65°C (4° to 149°F).  
Operating and storage humidity: 90% relative  
humidity at 40°C (104°F) maximum. Avoid getting the  
calculator wet.  
Battery operates at 6.0V dc, 80mA maximum.  
Batteries  
The calculator uses 4 AAA(LR03) batteries as main power  
and a CR2032 lithium battery for memory backup.  
Before using the calculator, please install the batteries  
according to the following procedure.  
R-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To install the main  
batteries  
a. Slide up the battery compartment cover as illustrated.  
b. Insert 4 new AAA (LR03) batteries into the main  
compartment. Make sure each battery is inserted in the  
indicated direction.  
To install the  
backup battery  
a. Press down the holder. Push the plate to the shown  
direction and lift it.  
b. Insert a new CR2032 lithium battery. Make sure its  
positive (+) side is facing up.  
c. Replace the plate and push it to the original place.  
After installing the batteries, press  
on.  
to turn the power  
Warning: It is recommended that you replace this battery  
every 5 years. When the low battery icon is displayed,  
you need to replace the batteries as soon as possible.  
However, avoid removing the backup battery and main  
batteries at the same time to avoid data lost.  
R-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Variables  
Home variables  
The home variables are:  
Category  
Complex  
Graphic  
Library  
Available name  
Z1...Z9, Z0  
G1...G9, G0  
Function  
Parametric  
Polar  
Sequence  
Solve  
Statistics  
User-named  
List  
L1...L9, L0  
M1...M9, M0  
Matrix  
Modes  
Ans  
Date  
HAngle  
HDigits  
HFormat  
Ierr  
Time  
Notepad  
Program  
User-named  
Editline  
User-named  
Real  
A...Z, θ  
R-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Function aplet variables  
The function aplet variables are:  
Category  
Available name  
Plot  
Axes  
Xcross  
Ycross  
Xtick  
Ytick  
Xmin  
Connect  
Coord  
FastRes  
Grid  
Indep  
InvCross  
Labels  
Recenter  
Simult  
Tracing  
Xmax  
Ymin  
Ymax  
Xzoom  
Yxoom  
Plot-FCN  
Symbolic  
Area  
Root  
Extremum  
Isect  
Slope  
Angle  
F1  
F6  
F7  
F8  
F9  
F0  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
Numeric  
Digits  
NumRow  
Format  
NumStart  
NumStep  
NumType  
NumZoom  
NumCol  
NumFont  
NumIndep  
Note  
NoteText  
Page  
Sketch  
PageNum  
R-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parametric aplet variables  
The parametric aplet variables are:  
Category  
Available name  
Plot  
Axes  
Tracing  
Tstep  
Xcross  
Ycross  
Xtick  
Ytick  
Xmin  
Connect  
Coord  
Grid  
Indep  
InvCross  
Labels  
Recenter  
Simult  
Tmin  
Xmax  
Ymin  
Ymax  
Xzoom  
Yzoom  
Tmax  
Symbolic  
Angle  
X1  
Y5  
X6  
Y6  
X7  
Y7  
X8  
Y8  
X9  
Y9  
X0  
Y0  
Y1  
X2  
Y2  
X3  
Y3  
X4  
Y4  
X5  
Numeric  
Digits  
NumRow  
Format  
NumStart  
NumStep  
NumType  
NumZoom  
NumCol  
NumFont  
NumIndep  
Note  
NoteText  
Page  
Sketch  
PageNum  
R-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Polar aplet variables  
The polar aplet variables are:  
Category  
Available names  
Plot  
Axes  
Connect  
Coord  
Xcross  
Ycross  
Xtick  
Ytick  
Xmin  
Grid  
Indep  
InvCross  
Labels  
Recenter  
Simult  
Umin  
Xmax  
Ymin  
Ymax  
Xzoom  
Yxoom  
Umax  
θstep  
Tracing  
Symbolic  
Numeric  
Angle  
R1  
R6  
R7  
R8  
R9  
R0  
R2  
R3  
R4  
R5  
Digits  
NumRow  
Format  
NumStart  
NumStep  
NumType  
NumZoom  
NumCol  
NumFont  
NumIndep  
Note  
NoteText  
Page  
Sketch  
PageNum  
R-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sequence aplet variables  
The sequence aplet variables are:  
Category  
Available name  
Plot  
Axes  
Coord  
Grid  
Indep  
InvCross  
Labels  
Nmin  
Tracing  
Xcross  
Ycross  
Xtick  
Ytick  
Xmin  
Xmax  
Nmax  
Ymin  
Recenter  
SeqPlot  
Simult  
Ymax  
Xzoom  
Yzoom  
Symbolic  
Numeric  
Angle  
U1  
U2  
U3  
U4  
U6  
U7  
U8  
U9  
U0  
U5  
Digits  
Format  
NumCol  
NumFont  
NumIndep  
NumRow  
NumStart  
NumStep  
NumType  
NumZoom  
Note  
NoteText  
Page  
Sketch  
PageNum  
R-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Solve aplet variables  
The solve aplet variables are:  
Category  
Available name  
Plot  
Axes  
Connect  
Coord  
FastRes  
Grid  
Xcross  
Ycross  
Xtick  
Ytick  
Xmin  
Indep  
Xmax  
InvCross  
Labels  
Recenter  
Tracing  
Ymin  
Ymax  
Xzoom  
Yxoom  
Symbolic  
Numeric  
Angle  
E1  
E2  
E3  
E4  
E6  
E7  
E8  
E9  
E0  
E5  
Digits  
Format  
NumCol  
NumRow  
Note  
NoteText  
Page  
Sketch  
PageNum  
R-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Statistics aplet variables  
The statistics aplet variables are:  
Category  
Available name  
Plot  
Axes  
S4mark  
S5mark  
StatPlot  
Tracing  
Xcross  
Ycross  
Xtick  
Ytick  
Xmin  
Connect  
Coord  
Grid  
Hmin  
Hmax  
Hwidth  
Indep  
InvCross  
Labels  
Recenter  
S1mark  
S2mark  
S3mark  
Xmax  
Ymin  
Ymax  
Xzoom  
Yxoom  
Symbolic  
Numeric  
Angle  
S1fit  
S2fit  
S3fit  
S4fit  
S5fit  
C0,...C9  
Digits  
Format  
NumCol  
NumFont  
NumRow  
StatMode  
Stat-One  
Stat-Two  
MaxΣ  
MeanΣ  
Median  
MinΣ  
NΣ  
Q3  
PSDev  
SSDev  
PVarΣ  
SVarΣ  
TotΣ  
Q1  
Corr  
Cov  
Fit  
MeanX  
MeanY  
RelErr  
ΣX  
ΣX2  
ΣXY  
ΣY  
ΣY2  
Note  
NoteText  
Page  
Sketch  
PageNum  
R-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MATH menu categories  
Math functions  
The math functions are:  
Category  
Available name  
Calculus  
TAYLOR  
Complex  
Constant  
ARG  
IM  
RE  
CONJ  
e
i
MAXREAL  
MINREAL  
π
Hyperb.  
ACOSH  
ASINH  
ATANH  
COSH  
TANH  
ALOG  
EXP  
EXPM1  
LNP1  
SINH  
List  
CONCAT  
ΔLIST  
MAKELIST  
πLIST  
POS  
REVERSE  
SIZE  
ΣLIST  
SORT  
Loop  
ITERATE  
RECURSE  
Σ
R-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Category  
Available name (Continued)  
Matrix  
COLNORM  
COND  
QR  
RANK  
CROSS  
DET  
ROWNORM  
RREF  
DOT  
SCHUR  
SIZE  
SPECNORM  
SPECRAD  
SVD  
EIGENVAL  
EIGENVV  
IDENMAT  
INVERSE  
LQ  
SVL  
LSQ  
LU  
TRACE  
TRN  
MAKEMAT  
Polynom.  
Prob.  
POLYCOEF  
POLYEVAL  
POLYFORM  
POLYROOT  
COMB  
!
PERM  
RANDOM  
UTPC  
UTPF  
UTPN  
UTPT  
Real  
CEILING  
DEGRAD  
FLOOR  
FNROOT  
FRAC  
HMS→  
HMS  
INT  
MIN  
MOD  
%
%CHANGE  
%TOTAL  
RADDEG  
ROUND  
SIGN  
MANT  
MAX  
TRUNCATE  
XPON  
Stat-Two  
Symbolic  
PREDX  
PREDY  
=
QUAD  
QUOTE  
|
ISOLATE  
LINEAR?  
R-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Category  
Available name (Continued)  
Tests  
AND  
<
= =  
IFTE  
NOT  
OR  
XOR  
>
Trig  
ACOT  
ACSC  
ASEC  
COT  
CSC  
SEC  
Program constants  
The program constants are:  
Category  
Available name  
Angle  
Degrees  
Grads  
Radians  
Format  
Standard  
Fixed  
Sci  
Eng  
Fraction  
SeqPlot  
S1...5fit  
Cobweb  
Stairstep  
Linear  
LogFit  
ExpFit  
Power  
QuadFit  
Cubic  
Logist  
User  
Trigonometric Exponent  
StatMode  
StatPlot  
Stat1Var  
Stat2Var  
Hist  
BoxW  
R-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Physical Constants  
The physical constants are:  
Category  
Available Name  
Chemist  
Avogadro(Avogadro’s Number,  
NA)  
Boltz. (Boltmann, k)  
mol. vo... (molar volume, Vm)  
univ gas(universal gas, R)  
std temp(standard temperature,  
St dT)  
std pres(standard pressure,  
St dP)  
Phyics  
StefBolt(Stefan-Boltzmann, σ)  
light s...(speed of light, c)  
permitti(permittivity, ε0)  
permeab(permeability, μ0)  
acce gr... (acceleration of  
gravity, g)  
gravita...(gravitation, G)  
Quantum  
Plank’s(Plank’s constant, h)  
Dirac’s(Dirac’s, hbar)  
e charge(electronic charge, q)  
e mass(electron mass, me)  
q/me ra...(q/me ratio, qme)  
proton m(proton mass, mp)  
mp/me r...(mp/me ratio,  
mpme)  
fine str(fine structure, α)  
mag flux(magnetic flux, φ)  
Faraday(Faraday, F)  
Rydberg(Rydberg, R)  
Bohr rad (Bohr radius, a0)  
Bohr mag(Bohr magneton, μB)  
nuc. mag (nuclear magneton,  
μN)  
photon...(photon wavelength,  
λ)  
photon...(photon frequency,  
f0)  
Compt w...(Compton  
wavelength, λc)  
R-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Program commands  
The program commands are:  
Category  
Command  
Aplet  
CHECK  
SELECT  
SETVIEWS  
UNCHECK  
Branch  
Drawing  
Graphic  
IF  
CASE  
IFERR  
RUN  
THEN  
ELSE  
END  
STOP  
ARC  
BOX  
ERASE  
FREEZE  
LINE  
PIXOFF  
PIXON  
TLINE  
DISPLAY→  
DISPLAY  
GROB  
MAKEGROB  
PLOT→  
PLOT  
GROBNOT  
GROBOR  
REPLACE  
SUB  
GROBXOR  
ZEROGROB  
Loop  
FOR  
=
UNTIL  
END  
TO  
WHILE  
REPEAT  
END  
STEP  
END  
DO  
BREAK  
Matrix  
ADDCOL  
ADDROW  
DELCOL  
DELROW  
EDITMAT  
RANDMAT  
REDIM  
REPLACE  
SCALE  
SCALEADD  
SUB  
SWAPCOL  
SWAPROW  
Print  
PRDISPLAY  
PRHISTORY  
PRVAR  
Prompt  
BEEP  
FREEZE  
GETKEY  
INPUT  
MSGBOX  
PROMPT  
WAIT  
CHOOSE  
CLRVAR  
DISP  
DISPXY  
DISPTIME  
EDITMAT  
Stat-One  
DO1VSTATS  
RANDSEED  
SETFREQ  
SETSAMPLE  
R-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Category  
Command (Continued)  
Stat-Two  
DO2VSTATS  
SETDEPEND  
SETINDEP  
Status messages  
Message  
Meaning  
Bad Argument  
Type  
Incorrect input for this  
operation.  
Bad Argument  
Value  
The value is out of range for this  
operation.  
Infinite Result  
Math exception, such as 1/0.  
Insufficient  
Memory  
You must recover some memory  
to continue operation. Delete  
one or more matrices, lists,  
notes, or programs (using  
catalogs), or custom (not built-  
in) aplets (using  
MEMORY).  
Insufficient  
Statistics Data  
Not enough data points for the  
calculation. For two-variable  
statistics there must be two  
columns of data, and each  
column must have at least four  
numbers.  
Invalid Dimension  
Array argument had wrong  
dimensions.  
Invalid Statistics  
Data  
Need two columns with equal  
numbers of data values.  
R-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Message  
Meaning (Continued)  
Invalid Syntax  
The function or command you  
entered does not include the  
proper arguments or order of  
arguments. The delimiters  
(parentheses, commas,  
periods, and semi-colons) must  
also be correct. Look up the  
function name in the index to  
find its proper syntax.  
Name Conflict  
The | (where) function  
attempted to assign a value to  
the variable of integration or  
summation index.  
No Equations  
Checked  
You must enter and check an  
equation (Symbolic view)  
before evaluating this function.  
(OFF SCREEN)  
Receive Error  
Function value, root, extremum,  
or intersection is not visible in  
the current screen.  
Problem with data reception  
from another calculator. Re-  
send the data.  
Too Few  
Arguments  
The command requires more  
arguments than you supplied.  
Undefined Name  
Undefined Result  
The global variable named  
does not exist.  
The calculation has a  
mathematicallyundefinedresult  
(such as 0/0).  
Out of Memory  
You must recover a lot of  
memory to continue operation.  
Delete one or more matrices,  
lists, notes, or programs (using  
catalogs), or custom (not built-  
in) aplets (using  
MEMORY).  
R-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Limited Warranty  
HP 39gs Graphing Calculator; Warranty period: 12  
months  
1. HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, that HP  
hardware, accessories and supplies will be free from  
defects in materials and workmanship after the date  
of purchase, for the period specified above. If HP  
receives notice of such defects during the warranty  
period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace  
products which prove to be defective. Replacement  
products may be either new or like-new.  
2. HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to  
execute its programming instructions after the date of  
purchase, for the period specified above, due to  
defects in material and workmanship when properly  
installed and used. If HP receives notice of such  
defects during the warranty period, HP will replace  
software media which does not execute its  
programming instructions due to such defects.  
3. HP does not warrant that the operation of HP  
products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is  
unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace  
any product to a condition as warranted, you will be  
entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon  
prompt return of the product with proof of purchase.  
4. HP products may contain remanufactured parts  
equivalent to new in performance or may have been  
subject to incidental use.  
5. Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a)  
improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration,  
(b) software, interfacing, parts or supplies not  
supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or  
misuse, (d) operation outside of the published  
environmental specifications for the product, or (e)  
improper site preparation or maintenance.  
W-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. HP MAKES NO OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTY OR  
CONDITION WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL. TO  
THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, ANY  
IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF  
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, OR  
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IS LIMITED  
TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY  
SET FORTH ABOVE. Some countries, states or  
provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of  
an implied warranty, so the above limitation or  
exclusion might not apply to you. This warranty gives  
you specific legal rights and you might also have  
other rights that vary from country to country, state to  
state, or province to province.  
7. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE  
REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE  
YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS  
INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS  
SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR  
DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL  
(INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER  
DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT,  
OR OTHERWISE. Some countries, States or provinces  
do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental  
or consequential damages, so the above limitation or  
exclusion may not apply to you.  
8. The only warranties for HP products and services are  
set forth in the express warranty statements  
accompanying such products and services. HP shall  
not be liable for technical or editorial errors or  
omissions contained herein.  
FOR CONSUMER TRANSACTIONS IN AUSTRALIA AND  
NEW ZEALAND: THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED  
IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT  
LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT  
OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE  
MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE  
SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.  
W-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service  
Europe  
Country :  
Austria  
Telephone numbers  
+43-1-3602771203  
+32-2-7126219  
Belgium  
Denmark  
+45-8-2332844  
Eastern Europe +420-5-41422523  
countries  
Finland  
France  
+35-89640009  
+33-1-49939006  
+49-69-95307103  
+420-5-41422523  
+31-2-06545301  
+39-02-75419782  
+47-63849309  
Germany  
Greece  
Holland  
Italy  
Norway  
Portugal  
Spain  
+351-229570200  
+34-915-642095  
+46-851992065  
Sweden  
Switzerland  
+41-1-4395358  
(German)  
+41-22-8278780  
(French)  
+39-02-75419782  
(Italian)  
Turkey  
UK  
+420-5-41422523  
+44-207-4580161  
Czech Republic +420-5-41422523  
South Africa  
Luxembourg  
+27-11-2376200  
+32-2-7126219  
Other European +420-5-41422523  
countries  
Asia Pacific Country :  
Australia  
Telephone numbers  
+61-3-9841-5211  
+61-3-9841-5211  
Singapore  
W-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L.America Country:  
Argentina  
Telephone numbers  
0-810-555-5520  
Brazil  
Sao Paulo 3747-7799;  
ROTC 0-800-157751  
Mexico  
Mx City 5258-9922;  
ROTC 01-800-472-6684  
Venezuela  
Chile  
0800-4746-8368  
800-360999  
Columbia  
Peru  
9-800-114726  
0-800-10111  
1-800-711-2884  
Central  
America &  
Caribbean  
Guatemala  
Puerto Rico  
Costa Rica  
1-800-999-5105  
1-877-232-0589  
0-800-011-0524  
N.America Country :  
Telephone numbers  
U.S.  
1800-HP INVENT  
Canada  
(905) 206-4663 or  
800- HP INVENT  
ROTC = Rest of the country  
Please logon to http://www.hp.com for the latest service  
and support information.h  
W-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Regulatory information  
Federal  
Communications  
Commission Notice  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with  
the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15  
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide  
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a  
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses,  
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not  
installed and used in accordance with the instructions,  
may cause harmful interference to radio communications.  
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not  
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does  
cause harmful interference to radio or television  
reception, which can be determined by turning the  
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to  
correct the interference by one or more of the following  
measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and  
the receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit  
different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or  
television technician for help.  
Modifications  
Cables  
The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes  
or modifications made to this device that are not  
expressly approved by Hewlett-Packard Company may  
void the user's authority to operate the equipment.  
Connections to this device must be made with shielded  
cables with metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods to maintain  
compliance with FCC rules and regulations.  
Declaration of  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)  
this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)  
this device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
Conformity for  
Products Marked  
with FCC Logo,  
United States Only  
For questions regarding your product, contact:  
Hewlett-Packard Company  
P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113  
W-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Houston, Texas 77269-2000  
Or, call  
1-800-474-6836  
For questions regarding this FCC declaration, contact:  
Hewlett-Packard Company  
P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101  
Houston, Texas 77269-2000  
Or, call  
1-281-514-3333  
To identify this product, refer to the part, series, or model  
number found on the product.  
Canadian Notice  
Avis Canadien  
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of  
the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment  
Regulations.  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les  
exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du  
Canada.  
European Union  
Regulatory Notice  
This product complies with the following EU Directives:  
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC  
EMC Directive 89/336/EEC  
Compliance with these directives implies conformity to  
applicable harmonized European standards (European  
Norms) which are listed on the EU Declaration of  
Conformity issued by Hewlett-Packard for this product or  
product family.  
This compliance is indicated by the following conformity  
marking placed on the product:  
xxxx*  
This marking is valid for EU  
non-harmonized Telecom products.  
*Notified body number (used only if  
applicable - refer to the product label)  
This marking is valid for non-Tele-  
com prodcts and EU harmonized  
Telecom products (e.g. Bluetooth).  
Japanese Notice  
この装置は、 情報処理装置等電波障害自主規制協議会  
(VCCI) の基準に基づ く ク ラ ス B 情報技術装置です。 この装  
置は、 家庭環境で使用する こ と を目と し ていますが、 この  
装置ラジオやテレビジ ョ ン信機に近し て使用される と、  
受信障害を引き起こすこ とがあ り ます。  
取りい説明書に従正しい取り扱いを し て く だ さい。  
W-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Korean Notice  
Disposal of Waste  
Equipment by Users  
in Private  
Household in the  
European Union  
This symbol on the product or on its  
packaging indicates that this product  
must not be disposed of with your other  
household waste. Instead, it is your  
responsibility to dispose of your waste  
equipment by handing it over to a  
designated collection point for the  
recycling of waste electrical and  
electronic equipment. The separate collection and  
recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal  
will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it  
is recycled in a manner that protects human health and  
the environment. For more information about where you  
can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please  
contact your local city office, your household waste  
disposal service or the shop where you purchased the  
product.  
W-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
A
absolute value 13-5  
add 13-3  
algebraic entry 1-19  
alpha characters  
typing 1-6  
alphabetical sorting 19-6  
angle measure 1-10  
in statistics 10-12  
setting 1-11  
animation 17-5  
creating 17-5  
annunciators 1-3  
Ans (last answer) 1-24  
antilogarithm 13-4, 13-9  
aplet  
canceling operations in 1-1  
a sketch to an aplet 17-3  
attaching notes 19-4  
clearing 19-3  
copying 19-4  
definition of R-1  
deleting 19-6  
Function 13-21  
Inference 11-1  
key 1-4  
library 19-6  
Linear Solver 8-1  
opening 1-16  
Parametric 4-1  
Polar 5-1  
receiving 19-5  
resetting 19-3  
sending 19-4, 19-5  
Sketch view 17-1  
Solve 7-1  
B
bad argument R-18  
bad guesses error message 7-7  
batteries R-4  
sorting 19-6  
statistics 10-1  
transmitting 19-5  
Triangle Solver 9-1  
aplet commands  
CHECK 18-14  
SELECT 18-14  
SETVIEWS 18-17  
UNCHECK 18-17  
aplet variables  
box-and-whisker plot 10-16  
branch commands  
CASE...END 18-18  
IF...THEN...ELSE...END 18-18  
IFERR...THEN...ELSE 18-18  
branch structures 18-17  
build your own table 2-19  
I-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C
calculus  
operations 13-7  
catalogs 1-30  
i 13-8  
chronological sorting 19-6  
circle drawing 17-4  
clearing  
minimum real number 13-8  
physical 1-8, 13-25, R-16  
contrast  
aplet 19-3  
characters 1-22  
display 1-22  
decreasing display 1-2  
display history 1-25  
edit line 1-22  
lists 16-6  
plot 2-7  
cobweb graph 6-1  
coefficients  
polynomial 13-11  
columns  
changing position 18-25  
combinations 13-12  
commands  
CORR 10-17  
aplet 18-14  
branch 18-17  
definition of R-1  
drawing 18-19  
graphic 18-21  
loop 18-23  
print 18-26  
program 18-4, R-17  
stat-one 18-30  
stat-two 18-30  
with matrices 15-10  
complex number functions 13-5,  
13-16  
matrices 15-3  
conjugate 13-7  
imaginary part 13-7  
real part 13-7  
complex numbers 1-29  
entering 1-29  
vector 15-11  
curve fitting 10-12, 10-17  
math functions 13-7  
storing 1-29  
confidence intervals 11-15  
conjugate 13-7  
connecting  
D
data set definition 10-8  
date, setting 18-28  
data points 10-19  
variable 18-32  
via infrared 19-5  
via serial cable 19-5  
via USB cable 19-5  
debugging programs 18-7  
decimal  
changing format 1-10  
scaling 2-14, 2-15  
decreasing display contrast 1-2  
I-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
definite integral 13-6  
deleting  
aplet 19-6  
lists 16-6  
matrices 15-5  
programs 18-9  
statistical data 10-11  
delimiters, programming 18-1  
derivatives  
definition of 13-6  
in Function aplet 13-22  
in Home 13-21  
determinant  
square matrix 15-11  
differentiation 13-6  
display 18-21  
adjusting contrast 1-2  
annunciator line 1-2  
capture 18-21  
clearing 1-2  
engineering number format 1-11  
date and time 18-28  
element 15-5  
constant? 7-7  
elements 16-4  
engineering 1-10  
fixed 1-10  
fraction 1-10  
history 1-22  
line 1-23  
matrices 15-5  
parts of 1-2  
fit 10-13  
printing contents 18-26  
rescaling 2-13  
scientific 1-10  
scrolling through history 1-25  
soft key labels 1-2  
standard 1-10  
divide 13-3  
drawing  
circles 17-4  
keys 17-4  
plot 3-3  
extremum 3-10  
lines and boxes 17-3  
drawing commands  
ARC 18-19  
F
factorial 13-12  
BOX 18-20  
FastRes variable 18-32  
fit  
ERASE 18-20  
FREEZE 18-20  
LINE 18-20  
a curve to 2VAR data 10-17  
choosing 10-12  
PIXOFF 18-20  
PIXON 18-20  
defining your own 10-13  
fixed number format 1-10  
TLINE 18-20  
I-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
font size  
change 3-8, 17-5  
forecasting 10-20  
fraction number format 1-11  
full-precision display 1-10  
function  
splitting into plot and table 2-13  
statistical data 10-15  
analyze graph with FCN tools 3-4  
definition 2-2, R-1  
entering 1-19  
gamma 13-12  
intersection point 3-5  
math menu R-13  
slope 3-5  
syntax 13-2  
tracing 2-8  
Function aplet 2-20, 3-1  
function variables  
area 18-32  
REPLACE 18-22  
axes 18-32  
SUB 18-22  
connect 18-32  
fastres 18-32  
graphics  
grid 18-33  
copying 17-6  
storing and recalling 17-6, 18-21  
in menu map R-7  
indep 18-33  
isect 18-34  
labels 18-34  
Recenter 18-34  
root 18-34  
range 10-18  
ycross 18-37  
G
glossary R-1  
graph  
analyzing statistical data in 10-19  
auto scale 2-14  
box-and-whisker 10-16  
capture current display 18-21  
cobweb 6-1  
evaluating expressions 2-4  
reusing lines 1-23  
variables 14-1, 14-7, R-6  
horizontal zoom 18-38  
hyperbolic  
comparing 2-5  
connected points 10-17  
defining the independent variable  
18-36  
maths functions 13-10  
hyperbolic trigonometry  
ACOSH 13-9  
drawing axes 2-7  
expressions 3-3  
grid points 2-7  
ALOG 13-9  
histogram 10-15  
ASINH 13-9  
in Solve aplet 7-7  
one-variable statistics 10-18  
overlaying 2-15  
ATANH 13-9  
COSH 13-9  
EXP 13-10  
scatter 10-15, 10-17  
I-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EXPM1 13-10  
LNP1 13-10  
SINH 13-9  
intermediate guesses 7-7  
TANH 13-9  
hypothesis  
alternative 11-2  
inference tests 11-8  
null 11-2  
statistics data R-18  
syntax R-19  
inverse hyperbolic cosine 13-9  
inverse hyperbolic functions 13-10  
inverse hyperbolic tangent 13-9  
inverting matrices 15-8  
isect variable 18-34  
tests 11-2  
I
i 13-8  
implied multiplication 1-20  
importing  
graphics 17-6  
notes 17-8  
increasing display contrast 1-2  
indefinite integral  
using symbolic variables 13-23  
independent values  
adding to table 2-18  
independent variable  
defined for Tracing mode 18-33  
inference  
keyboard  
entry keys 1-5  
Notepad keys 17-8  
confidence intervals 11-15  
hypothesis tests 11-8  
One-Proportion Z-Interval 11-17  
One-Sample Z-Interval 11-15  
One-Sample Z-Test 11-8  
Two-Proportion Z-Interval 11-17  
Two-Proportion Z-Test 11-11  
Two-Sample T-Interval 11-19  
Two-Sample Z-Interval 11-16  
infinite result R-18  
L
labeling  
library, managing aplets in 19-6  
list  
infrared  
transmission of aplets 19-5  
initial guess 7-5  
input forms  
calculating product of 16-8  
composed from differences 16-7  
concatenating 16-7  
counting elements in 16-9  
creating 16-1, 16-3, 16-4, 16-5  
deleting 16-6  
resetting default values 1-9  
setting Modes 1-11  
insufficient memory R-18  
insufficient statistics data R-18  
integer rank  
matrix 15-12  
deleting list items 16-3  
displaying 16-4  
integer scaling 2-14, 2-15  
integral  
displaying list elements 16-4  
editing 16-3  
definite 13-6  
indefinite 13-23  
finding statistical values in list ele-  
ments 16-9  
integration 13-6  
I-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
generate a series 16-8  
list function syntax 16-6  
list variables 16-1  
returning position of element in  
16-8  
trigonometry 13-19  
enclosing arguments 1-21  
in scientific notation 1-20  
reversing order in 16-9  
sending and receiving 16-6  
sorting elements 16-9  
storing elements 16-1, 16-4, 16-5  
storing one element 16-6  
logarithm 13-4  
addition and subtraction 15-6  
logarithmic  
fit 10-13  
arithmetic operations in 15-6  
assembly from vectors 15-1  
column norm 15-10  
functions 13-3  
logical operators  
AND 13-19  
equals (logical test) 13-19  
greater than 13-19  
greater than or equal to 13-19  
IFTE 13-19  
creating 15-3  
less than 13-18  
less than or equal to 13-18  
NOT 13-19  
not equal to 13-19  
OR 13-19  
deleting columns 18-24  
XOR 13-19  
logistic fit 10-13  
display eigenvalues 15-11  
displaying 15-5  
loop commands  
displaying matrix elements 15-5  
dot product 15-11  
BREAK 18-24  
DO...UNTIL...END 18-23  
FOR I= 18-24  
WHILE...REPEAT...END 18-23  
loop functions  
ITERATE 13-10  
RECURSE 13-10  
summation 13-11  
low battery 1-1  
lowercase letters 1-6  
multiplying by vector 15-7  
multiplying row by value and add-  
ing result to second row 18-25  
multiplying row number by value  
18-25  
negating elements 15-8  
opening Matrix Editor 18-28  
raised to a power 15-7  
redimension 18-25  
replacing portion of matrix or vec-  
tor 18-25  
sending or receiving 15-4  
M
mantissa 13-15  
math functions  
complex number 13-7  
hyperbolic 13-10  
in menu map R-13  
keyboard 13-3  
logical operators 13-18  
menu 1-7  
polynomial 13-11  
probability 13-12  
I-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
singular value decomposition  
15-13  
singular values 15-13  
size 15-12  
spectral norm 15-13  
spectral radius 15-13  
start Matrix Editor 18-24  
storing elements 15-3, 15-5  
storing matrix elements 15-6  
swap column 18-25  
swap row 18-25  
transposing 15-13, 15-14  
variables 15-1  
natural exponential 13-3, 13-10  
matrix functions 15-10  
COLNORM 15-10  
COND 15-11  
CROSS 15-11  
DET 15-11  
Normal Z-distribution, confidence in-  
DOT 15-11  
EIGENVAL 15-11  
EIGENVV 15-11  
IDENMAT 15-11  
INVERSE 15-11  
LQ 15-11  
LSQ 15-11  
LU 15-12  
MAKEMAT 15-12  
QR 15-12  
RANK 15-12  
ROWNORM 15-12  
RREF 15-12  
SCHUR 15-12  
SIZE 15-12  
SPECNORM 15-13  
SPECRAD 15-13  
SVD 15-13  
SVL 15-13  
TRACE 15-13  
TRN 15-13  
fixed 1-10  
maximum real number 1-22, 13-8  
fraction 1-11  
in Solve aplet 7-5  
mixed fraction 1-11  
scientific 1-10  
memory R-18  
clearing all R-3  
organizing 14-9  
out of R-19  
Standard 1-10  
numeric precision 14-9  
Numeric view  
saving 1-25, 19-1  
viewing 14-1  
menu lists  
adding values 2-18  
automatic 2-16  
build your own table 2-19  
display defining function for col-  
umn 2-17  
searching 1-8  
minimum real number 13-8  
mixed fraction format 1-11  
modes  
I-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
recalculating 2-18  
overlaying 2-15, 4-3  
scaling 2-13  
setup 2-16, 2-19  
O
off  
automatic 1-1  
power 1-1  
on/cancel 1-1  
One-Proportion Z-Interval 11-17  
One-Sample T-Interval 11-18  
One-Sample T-Test 11-12  
One-Sample Z-Interval 11-15  
One-Sample Z-Test 11-8  
order of precedence 1-21  
overlaying plots 2-15, 4-3  
split-screen view 2-14  
splitting into plot and table 2-13  
P
tickmarks 2-6  
π 13-8  
tracing 2-8  
paired columns 10-11  
parametric variables  
axes 18-32  
plotting resolution  
plot-view variables  
connect 18-32  
grid 18-33  
in menu map R-8  
indep 18-33  
labels 18-34  
recenter 18-34  
ycross 18-37  
parentheses  
to close arguments 1-21  
to specify order of operation 1-21  
pause 18-30  
isect 18-34  
permutations 13-12  
pictures  
attaching in Sketch view 17-3  
plot  
analyzing statistical data in 10-19  
auto scale 2-14  
tracing 18-33  
umin/umax 18-36  
ustep 18-36  
box-and-whisker 10-16  
cobweb 6-1  
polar variables  
comparing 2-5  
connected points 10-17, 10-19  
decimal scaling 2-14  
defining the independent variable  
18-36  
axes 18-32  
connect 18-32  
grid 18-33  
in menu map R-9  
indep 18-33  
drawing axes 2-7  
expressions 3-3  
labels 18-34  
grid points 2-7  
recenter 18-34  
histogram 10-15  
ycross 18-37  
I-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
polynomial  
insert line breaks 18-29  
set date and time 18-28  
coefficients 13-11  
evaluation 13-11  
form 13-11  
roots 13-12  
Taylor 13-7  
polynomial functions  
POLYCOEF 13-11  
POLYEVAL 13-11  
POLYFORM 13-11  
POLYROOT 13-12  
ports 19-5  
position argument 18-21  
power (x raised to y) 13-5  
precedence 1-22  
predicted values  
statistical 10-20  
print  
Q
function 3-4  
contents of display 18-26  
name and contents of variable  
18-26  
minimum 13-8  
object in history 18-26  
variables 18-26  
probability functions  
! 13-12  
COMB 13-12  
RANDOM 13-13  
UTPC 13-13  
UTPF 13-13  
UTPN 13-13  
UTPT 13-13  
program  
commands 18-4  
MIN 13-15  
copying 18-8  
creating 18-4  
debugging 18-7  
deleting 18-9  
delimiters 18-1  
XPON 13-17  
editing 18-5  
naming 18-4  
recalculation for table 2-18  
receive error R-19  
receiving  
pausing 18-30  
printing 18-26  
sending and receiving 18-8  
structured 18-1  
prompt commands  
beep 18-26  
aplet 19-5  
lists 16-6  
matrices 15-4  
programs 18-8  
create choose box 18-26  
create input form 18-29  
display item 18-27  
display message box 18-29  
redrawing  
table of numbers 2-17  
reduced row echelon 15-12  
I-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
regression  
analysis 10-17  
fit models 10-13  
formula 10-12  
Grid 18-33  
user-defined fit 10-13  
relative error  
Recenter 18-34  
statistical 10-18  
resetting  
aplet 19-3  
calculator R-3  
memory R-3  
result  
time 18-28  
sign reversal 7-6  
sine 13-4  
copying to edit line 1-22  
reusing 1-22  
root  
inverse hyperbolic 13-9  
interactive 3-10  
nth 13-6  
variable 18-34  
root-finding  
displaying 7-7  
interactive 3-9  
operations 3-10  
variables 3-10  
creating a blank graphic 18-23  
S
sets 17-5  
S1mark-S5mark variables 18-35  
scaling  
storing in graphics variable 17-5  
slope 3-10  
automatic 2-14  
decimal 2-10, 2-14  
integer 2-10, 2-14, 2-15  
options 2-13  
resetting 2-13  
initial guesses 7-5  
trigonometric 2-14  
scatter plot 10-15, 10-17  
connected 10-17, 10-19  
SCHUR decomposition 15-12  
scientific number format 1-10, 1-20  
scrolling  
plotting to find guesses 7-7  
solve variables  
in Trace mode 2-8  
axes 18-32  
searching  
connect 18-32  
menu lists 1-8  
fastres 18-32  
speed searches 1-8  
grid 18-33  
secant 13-20  
in menu map R-11  
indep 18-33  
sending  
aplets 19-4  
labels 18-34  
lists 16-6  
recenter 18-34  
programs 18-8  
ycross 18-37  
sequence  
sorting 19-6  
definition 2-2  
aplets in alphabetic order 19-6  
I-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
aplets in chronological order 19-6  
elements in a list 16-9  
spectral norm 15-13  
spectral radius 15-13  
square root 13-5  
step size of independent variable  
stack history  
storing  
printing 18-26  
stairsteps graph 6-1  
standard number format 1-10  
statistics  
16-6  
matrix elements 15-3, 15-5, 15-6  
value 14-2  
analysis 10-1  
analyzing plots 10-19  
angle mode 10-12  
calculate one-variable 18-30  
calculate two-variable 18-30  
data set variables 18-41  
data structure 18-41  
define one-variable sample 18-30  
define two-variable data set’s de-  
pendent column 18-31  
define two-variable data set’s in-  
dependent column 18-31  
defining a fit 10-12  
defining a regression model  
10-12  
defining expressions 2-1  
displaying definitions 3-8  
evaluating variables in view 2-3  
setup view for statistics 10-12  
symbolic functions  
deleting data 10-11  
editing data 10-10  
frequency 18-30  
inserting data 10-11  
plot type 10-18  
plotting data 10-15  
predicted values 10-20  
regression curve (fit) models  
10-12  
QUAD 13-18  
saving data 10-10  
sorting data 10-11  
specifying angle setting 10-12  
toggling between one-variable  
and two-variable 10-12  
tracing plots 10-19  
troubleshooting with plots 10-19  
zooming in plots 10-19  
statistics variables  
table  
navigate around 3-8  
numeric values 3-7  
numeric view setup 2-16  
tangent 13-4  
Axes 18-32  
inverse hyperbolic 13-9  
Taylor polynomial 13-7  
θrng 2-6  
θstep 2-6  
tickmarks for plotting 2-6  
time 13-14  
Connect 18-32  
Grid 18-33  
Hmin/Hmax 18-33  
Hwidth 18-33  
in menu map R-12  
Indep 18-33  
I-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
setting 18-28  
time, converting 13-14  
times sign 1-20  
upper-tail Snedecor’s F 13-13  
tmax 18-36  
tmin 18-36  
too few arguments R-19  
tracing  
regression fit 10-13  
functions 2-8  
more than one curve 2-8  
not matching plot 2-8  
plots 2-8  
recall 14-3  
transmitting  
lists 16-6  
matrices 15-4  
programs 18-8  
transposing a matrix 15-13  
Triangle Solver aplet 9-1  
trigonometric  
definition 14-1, 14-7, R-2  
in Symbolic view 2-3  
fit 10-13  
functions 13-19  
scaling 2-10, 2-14, 2-15  
trigonometry functions  
ACOT 13-19  
previous result (Ans) 1-23  
VARS menu 14-4, 14-5  
vectors  
ACSC 13-20  
ASEC 13-20  
COT 13-20  
CSC 13-20  
SEC 13-20  
trng 2-6  
truncating values to decimal places  
13-16  
column 15-1  
tstep 2-6, 18-37  
Two-Proportion Z-Interval 11-17  
Two-Proportion Z-Test 11-11  
Two-Sample T-Interval 11-19  
Two-Sample T-test 11-14  
Two-Sample Z-Interval 11-16  
typing letters 1-6  
configuration 1-18  
W
warning symbol 1-8  
where command ( | ) 13-18  
U
X
undefined  
Xcross variable 18-37  
xrng 2-6  
name R-19  
result R-19  
un-zoom 2-11  
Y
upper-tail chi-squared probability  
13-13  
Ycross variable 18-37  
yrng 2-6  
upper-tail normal probability 13-13  
I-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
options within a table 2-17  
out 2-9  
Z
Z-Interval 11-15  
zoom 2-17  
axes 2-12  
redrawing table of numbers op-  
tions 2-17  
square 2-10  
un-zoom 2-11  
box 2-9  
center 2-9  
within Numeric view 2-17  
X-zoom 2-9  
examples of 2-11  
factors 2-13  
in 2-9  
Y-zoom 2-10  
options 2-9, 3-8  
I-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Graco Baby Accessories PD178040A User Manual
Graco Cooktop ISPS002AC User Manual
Graco Inc Power Roller 245907 User Manual
Grizzly Sander G0723 User Manual
Grizzly Saw G0514X2 User Manual
Harbor Freight Tools Water Pump 68375 User Manual
Honeywell Boiler L7224 User Manual
Hotpoint Freezer 6950 User Manual
HTC Cell Phone HS S200 User Manual
Husqvarna Lawn Mower 115 127127 IR User Manual